1gm(1)                       General Commands Manual                      gm(1)
2
3
4
5       NAME
6
7              gm  - command-line utility to create, edit, compare, convert, or
8              display images
9
10

SYNOPSIS

12       gm animate [ options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ]
13
14       gm batch [ options ... ] [ script ]
15
16       gm benchmark [ options ... ] subcommand
17
18       gm compare [ options ... ] reference-image [  options  ...  ]  compare-
19       image [ options ... ]
20
21       gm  composite  [  options  ... ] change-image base-image [ mask-image ]
22       output-image
23
24       gm conjure [ options ] script.msl [ [ options ] script.msl ]
25
26       gm convert [ [ options ... ] [ input-file ...  ] [ options ... ] ] out‐
27       put-file
28
29       gm display [ options ... ] file ...  [ [options ... ]file ... ]
30
31       gm identify file [ file ... ]
32
33       gm import [ options ... ] file
34
35       gm mogrify [ options ... ] file ...
36
37       gm  montage  [  options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ] output-
38       file
39
40       gm time subcommand
41
42       gm version
43

DESCRIPTION

45       GraphicsMagick's gm provides a suite of utilities for creating, compar‐
46       ing,  converting, editing, and displaying images.  All of the utilities
47       are provided as sub-commands of a single gm executable.   The  gm  exe‐
48       cutable  returns  the exit code 0 to indicate success, or 1 to indicate
49       failure:
50
51       animate displays an animation (e.g. a GIF file) on any workstation dis‐
52       play running an X server.
53
54       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
55       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
56       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
57       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
58
59       benchmark executes one of the other utility commands (e.g. convert) for
60       a specified number of iterations, or execution time, and reports execu‐
61       tion time and other profiling  information  such  as  CPU  utilization.
62       Benchmark provides various operating modes including executing the com‐
63       mand with a varying number of threads, and alternate reporting  formats
64       such as comma-separated value (CSV).
65
66       compare compares two images and reports difference statistics according
67       to specified metrics and/or outputs an image with a visual  representa‐
68       tion  of  the  differences.   It may also be used to test if images are
69       similar within a particular range and  specified  metric,  returning  a
70       truth value to the executing environment.
71
72       composite  composites images (blends or merges images together) to cre‐
73       ate new images.
74
75       conjure interprets and executes scripts in the  Magick  Scripting  Lan‐
76       guage (MSL).
77
78       convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
79       with the same or differing image format  while  applying  an  arbitrary
80       number of image transformations.
81
82       display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
83       play facility. It can display an image on any workstation display  run‐
84       ning an X server.
85
86       identify  describes the format and characteristics of one or more image
87       files. It will also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.
88
89       import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
90       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
91       screen, or any rectangular portion of the screen.
92
93       mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
94       include image scaling, image rotation, color reduction, and others. The
95       transmogrified image overwrites the original image.
96
97       montage creates a composite by combining several separate  images.  The
98       images  are  tiled  on  the  composite image with the name of the image
99       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
100
101       time executes a subcommand and reports the user, system, and total exe‐
102       cution time consumed.
103
104       version  reports  the  GraphicsMagick  release version, maximum sample-
105       depth, copyright notice, supported features, and the options used while
106       building the software.
107
108       The GraphicsMagick utilities recognize the following image formats:
109
110
111       Name  Mode Description
112        o  3FR       r-- Hasselblad Photo RAW
113        o  8BIM      rw- Photoshop resource format
114        o  8BIMTEXT  rw- Photoshop resource text format
115        o  8BIMWTEXT rw- Photoshop resource wide text format
116        o  APP1      rw- Raw application information
117        o  APP1JPEG  rw- Raw JPEG binary data
118        o  ART       r-- PF1: 1st Publisher
119        o  ARW       r-- Sony Alpha DSLR RAW
120        o  AVS       rw+ AVS X image
121        o  BIE       rw- Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
122                         interchange format
123        o  BMP       rw+ Microsoft Windows bitmap image
124        o  BMP2      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v2
125        o  BMP3      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v3
126        o  CACHE     --- Magick Persistent Cache image format
127        o  CALS      rw- Continuous Acquisition and Life-cycle
128                         Support Type 1 image
129        o  CAPTION   r-- Caption (requires separate size info)
130        o  CIN       rw- Kodak Cineon Format
131        o  CMYK      rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
132                         samples (8 or 16 bits, depending on
133                         the image depth)
134        o  CMYKA     rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and
135                         matte samples (8 or 16 bits, depending
136                         on the image depth)
137        o  CR2       r-- Canon Photo RAW
138        o  CRW       r-- Canon Photo RAW
139        o  CUR       r-- Microsoft Cursor Icon
140        o  CUT       r-- DR Halo
141        o  DCM       r-- Digital Imaging and Communications in
142                         Medicine image
143        o  DCR       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
144        o  DCX       rw+ ZSoft IBM PC multi-page Paintbrush
145        o  DNG       r-- Adobe Digital Negative
146        o  DPS       r-- Display PostScript Interpreter
147        o  DPX       rw- Digital Moving Picture Exchange
148        o  EPDF      rw- Encapsulated Portable Document Format
149        o  EPI       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
150                         Interchange format
151        o  EPS       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
152        o  EPS2      -w- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
153        o  EPS3      -w- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
154        o  EPSF      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
155        o  EPSI      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
156                         Interchange format
157        o  EPT       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript with MS-DOS
158                         TIFF preview
159        o  EPT2      rw- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
160                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
161        o  EPT3      rw- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
162                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
163        o  EXIF      rw- Exif digital camera binary data
164        o  FAX       rw+ Group 3 FAX (Not TIFF Group3 FAX!)
165        o  FITS      rw- Flexible Image Transport System
166        o  FRACTAL   r-- Plasma fractal image
167        o  FPX       rw- FlashPix Format
168        o  GIF       rw+ CompuServe graphics interchange format
169        o  GIF87     rw- CompuServe graphics interchange format
170                         (version 87a)
171        o  GRADIENT  r-- Gradual passing from one shade to
172                         another
173        o  GRAY      rw+ Raw gray samples (8/16/32 bits,
174                         depending on the image depth)
175        o  HISTOGRAM -w- Histogram of the image
176        o  HRZ       r-- HRZ: Slow scan TV
177        o  HTML      -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
178                         client-side image map
179        o  ICB       rw+ Truevision Targa image
180        o  ICC       rw- ICC Color Profile
181        o  ICM       rw- ICC Color Profile
182        o  ICO       r-- Microsoft icon
183        o  ICON      r-- Microsoft icon
184        o  IDENTITY  r-- Hald CLUT identity image
185        o  IMAGE     r-- GraphicsMagick Embedded Image
186        o  INFO      -w+ Image descriptive information and
187                          statistics
188        o  IPTC      rw- IPTC Newsphoto
189        o  IPTCTEXT  rw- IPTC Newsphoto text format
190        o  IPTCWTEXT rw- IPTC Newsphoto wide text format
191        o  JBG       rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
192                         interchange format
193        o  JBIG      rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
194                         interchange format
195        o  JNG       rw- JPEG Network Graphics
196        o  JP2       rw- JPEG-2000 JP2 File Format Syntax
197        o  JPC       rw- JPEG-2000 Code Stream Syntax
198        o  JPEG      rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
199                         JFIF format
200        o  JPG       rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
201                         JFIF format
202        o  K25       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
203        o  KDC       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
204        o  LABEL     r-- Text image format
205        o  M2V       rw+ MPEG-2 Video Stream
206        o  MAP       rw- Colormap intensities and indices
207        o  MAT       r-- MATLAB image format
208        o  MATTE     -w+ MATTE format
209        o  MIFF      rw+ Magick Image File Format
210        o  MNG       rw+ Multiple-image Network Graphics
211        o  MONO      rw- Bi-level bitmap in least-significant-
212                         -byte-first order
213        o  MPC       rw+ Magick Persistent Cache image format
214        o  MPEG      rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
215        o  MPG       rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
216        o  MRW       r-- Minolta Photo Raw
217        o  MSL       r-- Magick Scripting Language
218        o  MTV       rw+ MTV Raytracing image format
219        o  MVG       rw- Magick Vector Graphics
220        o  NEF       r-- Nikon Electronic Format
221        o  NULL      r-- Constant image of uniform color
222        o  OTB       rw- On-the-air bitmap
223        o  P7        rw+ Xv thumbnail format
224        o  PAL       rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
225        o  PALM      rw- Palm Pixmap
226        o  PBM       rw+ Portable bitmap format (black and white)
227        o  PCD       rw- Photo CD
228        o  PCDS      rw- Photo CD
229        o  PCL       -w- Page Control Language
230        o  PCT       rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
231        o  PCX       rw- ZSoft IBM PC Paintbrush
232        o  PDB       rw+ Palm Database ImageViewer Format
233        o  PDF       rw+ Portable Document Format
234        o  PEF       r-- Pentax Electronic File
235        o  PFA       r-- TrueType font
236        o  PFB       r-- TrueType font
237        o  PGM       rw+ Portable graymap format (gray scale)
238        o  PGX       r-- JPEG-2000 VM Format
239        o  PICON     rw- Personal Icon
240        o  PICT      rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
241        o  PIX       r-- Alias/Wavefront RLE image format
242        o  PLASMA    r-- Plasma fractal image
243        o  PNG       rw- Portable Network Graphics
244        o  PNG24     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 24 bit RGB
245                         opaque only
246        o  PNG32     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 32 bit RGBA
247                         semitransparency OK
248        o  PNG8      rw- Portable Network Graphics, 8-bit
249                         indexed, binary transparency only
250        o  PNM       rw+ Portable anymap
251        o  PPM       rw+ Portable pixmap format (color)
252        o  PREVIEW   -w- Show a preview an image enhancement,
253                         effect, or f/x
254        o  PS        rw+ Adobe PostScript
255        o  PS2       -w+ Adobe Level II PostScript
256        o  PS3       -w+ Adobe Level III PostScript
257        o  PSD       rw- Adobe Photoshop bitmap
258        o  PTIF      rw- Pyramid encoded TIFF
259        o  PWP       r-- Seattle Film Works
260        o  RAF       r-- Fuji Photo RAW
261        o  RAS       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
262        o  RGB       rw+ Raw red, green, and blue samples
263        o  RGBA      rw+ Raw red, green, blue, and matte samples
264        o  RLA       r-- Alias/Wavefront image
265        o  RLE       r-- Utah Run length encoded image
266        o  SCT       r-- Scitex HandShake
267        o  SFW       r-- Seattle Film Works
268        o  SGI       rw+ Irix RGB image
269        o  SHTML     -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
270                         client-side image map
271        o  STEGANO   r-- Steganographic image
272        o  SUN       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
273        o  SVG       rw+ Scalable Vector Gaphics
274        o  TEXT      rw+ Raw text
275        o  TGA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
276        o  TIFF      rw+ Tagged Image File Format
277        o  TILE      r-- Tile image with a texture
278        o  TIM       r-- PSX TIM
279        o  TOPOL     r-- TOPOL X Image
280        o  TTF       r-- TrueType font
281        o  TXT       rw+ Raw text
282        o  UIL       -w- X-Motif UIL table
283        o  UYVY      rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
284        o  VDA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
285        o  VICAR     rw- VICAR rasterfile format
286        o  VID       rw+ Visual Image Directory
287        o  VIFF      rw+ Khoros Visualization image
288        o  VST       rw+ Truevision Targa image
289        o  WBMP      rw- Wireless Bitmap (level 0) image
290        o  WMF       r-- Windows Metafile
291        o  WPG       r-- Word Perfect Graphics
292        o  X         rw- X Image
293        o  X3F       r-- Foveon X3 (Sigma/Polaroid) RAW
294        o  XBM       rw- X Windows system bitmap (black
295                         and white)
296        o  XC        r-- Constant image uniform color
297        o  XCF       r-- GIMP image
298        o  XMP       rw- Adobe XML metadata
299        o  XPM       rw- X Windows system pixmap (color)
300        o  XV        rw+ Khoros Visualization image
301        o  XWD       rw- X Windows system window dump (color)
302        o  YUV       rw- CCIR 601 4:1:1 or 4:2:2 (8-bit only)
303
304           Modes:
305                     r   Read
306                     w   Write
307                     +   Multi-image
308
309
310       Support  for  some  of  these  formats  require  additional programs or
311       libraries.  See README in the source package for where to find optional
312       additional software.
313
314       Note,  a  format delineated with + means that if more than one image is
315       specified, frames are combined into  a  single  multi-image  file.  Use
316       +adjoin if you want a single image produced for each frame.
317
318       Your installation might not support all of the formats in the list.  To
319       get an accurate listing of the formats  supported  by  your  particular
320       configuration, run "gm convert -list format".
321
322       Raw  images  are  expected to have one byte per pixel unless gm is com‐
323       piled in 16-bit quantum mode or in 32-bit quantum mode. Here,  the  raw
324       data  is  expected  to  be  stored two or four bytes per pixel, respec‐
325       tively, in most-significant-byte-first order.   For  example,  you  can
326       tell  if  gm was compiled in 16-bit mode by typing "gm version" without
327       any options, and looking for "Q:16" in the first line of output.
328

FILES AND FORMATS

330       By default, the image format is determined by its magic  number,  i.e.,
331       the  first few bytes of the file. To specify a particular image format,
332       precede  the  filename  with  an  image  format  name   and   a   colon
333       (i.e.ps:image)  or  specify  the  image  type  as  the  filename suffix
334       (i.e.image.ps).  The magic number takes precedence  over  the  filename
335       suffix  and  the  prefix takes precedence over the magic number and the
336       suffix in input files.  When a file is read, its magic number is stored
337       in  the  "image->magick"  string.   In  output  files, the prefix takes
338       precedence over the filename suffix,  and  the  filename  suffix  takes
339       precedence over the "image->magick" string.
340
341       To read the "built-in" formats (GRANITE, H, LOGO, NETSCAPE, PLASMA, and
342       ROSE) use a prefix (including the colon) without a filename or  suffix.
343       To read the XC format, follow the colon with a color specification.  To
344       read the CAPTION format, follow the colon with a text string or with  a
345       filename prefixed with the at symbol (@).
346
347
348       When  you  specify X as your image type, the filename has special mean‐
349       ing. It specifies an X window by id, name, or root. If no  filename  is
350       specified,  the window is selected by clicking the mouse in the desired
351       window.
352
353       Specify input_file as - for standard input, output_file as - for  stan‐
354       dard  output.   If  input_file has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is
355       uncompressed with uncompress or gunzip  respectively.   If  output_file
356       has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is compressed using with compress
357       or gzip respectively.
358
359       Use an optional index enclosed in brackets after an input file name  to
360       specify  a  desired  subimage  of  a multi-resolution image format like
361       Photo CD (e.g. "img0001.pcd[4]") or  a  range  for  MPEG  images  (e.g.
362       "video.mpg[50-75]").  A  subimage  specification  can be disjoint (e.g.
363       "image.tiff[2,7,4]"). For raw images, specify a subimage with a  geome‐
364       try  (e.g.  -size  640x512  "image.rgb[320x256+50+50]").   Surround the
365       image name with quotation marks to prevent your shell from interpreting
366       the  square  brackets.  Single images are written with the filename you
367       specify. However, multi-part images (e.g., a multi-page PostScript doc‐
368       ument  with  +adjoin  specified)  may  be written with the scene number
369       included as part of the filename. In order to include the scene  number
370       in  the  filename,  it is necessary to include a printf-style %d format
371       specification in the file name and use the +adjoin option. For example,
372
373           image%02d.miff
374
375
376       writes files image00.miff, image01.miff, etc. Only a single  specifica‐
377       tion  is allowed within an output filename. If more than one specifica‐
378       tion is present, it will be ignored. It is best to embed the scene num‐
379       ber  in  the  base part of the file name, not in the extension, because
380       the extension will not be a recognizeable image type.
381
382       When running a commandline utility, you can prepend an at sign @  to  a
383       filename to read a list of image filenames from that file. This is con‐
384       venient in the event you have too many image filenames to  fit  on  the
385       command line.
386

OPTIONS

388       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
389       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
390       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
391       Some options only affect the decoding of images  and  others  only  the
392       encoding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
393
394       This  is a combined list of the command-line options used by the Graph‐
395       icsMagick utilities (animate,  compare,  composite,  convert,  display,
396       identify, import, mogrify and montage).
397
398
399       In  this  document,  angle  brackets ("<>") enclose variables and curly
400       brackets ("{}") enclose optional parameters. For example, "-fuzz  <dis‐
401       tance>{%}" means you can use the option "-fuzz 10" or "-fuzz 2%".
402
403
404       -adjoin
405              join images into a single multi-image file
406
407              By  default,  all  images of an image sequence are stored in the
408              same file. However, some formats  (e.g.  JPEG)  do  not  support
409              storing more than one image per file and only the first frame in
410              an image sequence will be saved unless the result  is  saved  to
411              separate  files.  Use +adjoin to force saving multiple frames to
412              multiple numbered files. If +adjoin is  used,  then  the  output
413              filename  must  include  a printf style formatting specification
414              for the numeric part of the filename.  For example,
415
416                  image%02d.miff
417
418
419       -affine <matrix>
420              drawing transform matrix
421
422              This option provides a transform matrix {sx,rx,ry,sy,tx,ty}  for
423              use by subsequent -draw or -transform options.
424
425       -antialias
426              remove pixel aliasing
427
428              By default antialiasing algorithms are used when drawing objects
429              (e.g. lines) or rendering vector formats  (e.g.  WMF  and  Post‐
430              script).  Use  +antialias  to  disable use of antialiasing algo‐
431              rithms.  Reasons  to  disable  antialiasing   include   avoiding
432              increasing colors in the image, or improving rendering speed.
433
434       -append
435              append a set of images
436
437              This option creates a single image where the images in the orig‐
438              inal set are stacked top-to-bottom.  If they are not of the same
439              width, any narrow images will be expanded to fit using the back‐
440              ground color.  Use +append to stack images  left-to-right.   The
441              set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.  If
442              the -append option appears after all of the  input  images,  all
443              images are appended.
444
445        -asc-cdl <spec>
446              apply ASC CDL color transform
447
448              Applies  ("bakes  in")  the  ASC  CDL, which is a format for the
449              exchange of basic  primary  color  grading  information  between
450              equipment  and software from different manufacturers. The format
451              defines the math for three functions: slope, offset  and  power.
452              Each  function  uses a number for the red, green, and blue color
453              channels for a total of nine numbers comprising a  single  color
454              decision. The tenth number (optional) is for chromiance (satura‐
455              tion) as specified by ASC CDL 1.2.
456
457              The argument string is comma delimited and is in  the  following
458              form (but without invervening spaces or line breaks)
459
460                  redslope,redoffset,redpower:
461                  greenslope,greenoffset,greenpower:
462                  blueslope,blueoffset,bluepower:
463                  saturation
464
465
466              with the unity (no change) specification being:
467
468                  "1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0"
469
470
471       -authenticate <string>
472              decrypt image with this password
473
474              Use  this option to supply a password for decrypting an image or
475              an image sequence, if it is being read from a format such as PDF
476              that  supports  encryption.   Encrypting images being written is
477              not supported.
478
479       -auto-orient
480              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
481
482              Adjusts the image orienation so that it is suitable for viewing.
483              Uses the orientation tag obtained from the image file or as sup‐
484              plied by the -orient option.
485
486       -average
487              average a set of images
488
489              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
490              If  the  -average  option appears after all of the input images,
491              all images are averaged.
492
493       -backdrop
494              display the image centered on a backdrop.
495
496              This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is useful
497              for  hiding other X window activity while viewing the image. The
498              color of the backdrop is specified as the foreground color  (X11
499              default is black).  Refer to "X Resources", below, for details.
500
501       -background <color>
502              the background color
503
504              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
505              -fill option.
506
507       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
508              pixels below the threshold become black
509
510              Use -black-threshold to set pixels with values below the  speci‐
511              fied  threshold  to  minimum value (black). If only one value is
512              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
513              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
514              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
515              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
516              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
517              a  channel  later  in  the  list.  If  a  percent  (%) symbol is
518              appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
519              range.
520
521       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
522              blue chromaticity primary point
523
524       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
525              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
526
527              Blur with the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
528
529       -border <width>x<height>
530              surround the image with a border of color
531
532              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
533
534       -bordercolor <color>
535              the border color
536
537              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
538              -fill option.
539
540       -borderwidth <geometry>
541              the border width
542
543       -box <color>
544              set the color of the annotation bounding box
545
546              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
547              -fill option.
548
549              See -draw for further details.
550
551       -channel <type>
552              the type of channel
553
554              Choose  from:  Red,  Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan, Magenta,
555              Yellow, Black, or Gray.
556
557              Use this option to extract a particular channel from the  image.
558              Opacity,  for example, is useful for extracting the opacity val‐
559              ues from an image.
560
561       -charcoal <factor>
562              simulate a charcoal drawing
563
564       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
565              remove pixels from the interior of an image
566
567              Width and height give the number of columns and rows to  remove,
568              and  x  and y are offsets that give the location of the leftmost
569              column and topmost row to remove.
570
571              The x offset normally specifies the leftmost column  to  remove.
572              If  the  -gravity  option  is  present  with NorthEast, East, or
573              SouthEast gravity, it gives the distance leftward from the right
574              edge of the image to the rightmost column to remove.  Similarly,
575              the y offset normally specifies the topmost row to  remove,  but
576              if  the  -gravity  option  is  present with SouthWest, South, or
577              SouthEast gravity, it specifies the  distance  upward  from  the
578              bottom edge of the image to the bottom row to remove.
579
580              The  -chop option removes entire rows and columns, and moves the
581              remaining corner blocks leftward and upward to close the gaps.
582
583       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
584
585              If a clipping path is present, it will be applied to  subsequent
586              operations.
587
588              For example, if you type the following command:
589
590                  gm convert -clip -negate cockatoo.tif negated.tif
591
592
593              only the pixels within the clipping path are negated.
594
595              The  -clip feature requires the XML library.  If the XML library
596              is not present, the option is ignored.
597
598       -coalesce
599              merge a sequence of images
600
601              Each image N in the sequence after Image 0 is replaced with  the
602              image created by flattening images 0 through N.
603
604              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
605              If the -coalesce option appears after all of the  input  images,
606              all images are coalesced.
607
608       -colorize <value>
609              colorize the image with the pen color
610
611              Specify  the  amount  of  colorization  as a percentage. You can
612              apply separate colorization values to the red, green,  and  blue
613              channels  of  the image with a colorization value list delimited
614              with slashes (e.g. 0/0/50).
615
616              The -colorize option may be used in conjunction  with  -modulate
617              to produce a nice sepia toned image like:
618
619                  gm convert input.ppm -modulate 115,0,100 \
620                            -colorize 7,21,50 output.ppm.
621
622
623       -colormap <type>
624              define the colormap type
625
626              Choose between shared or private.
627
628              This  option  only  applies  when the default X server visual is
629              PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more details.  By
630              default, a shared colormap is allocated. The image shares colors
631              with other X clients.  Some image colors could be  approximated,
632              therefore  your  image  may  look  very different than intended.
633              Choose Private and the image colors appear exactly as  they  are
634              defined.  However,  other  clients  may  go technicolor when the
635              image colormap is installed.
636
637       -colors <value>
638              preferred number of colors in the image
639
640              The actual number of colors in the image may be less  than  your
641              request, but never more. Note, this is a color reduction option.
642              Images with less unique colors than specified with  this  option
643              will  have  any duplicate or unused colors removed. The ordering
644              of an existing color palette may be altered. When converting  an
645              image  from  color  to  grayscale, convert the image to the gray
646              colorspace before reducing the number of colors since  doing  so
647              is most efficient. Refer to <a href="quantize.html">quantize for
648              more details.
649
650              Note, options -dither, -colorspace, and  -treedepth  affect  the
651              color reduction algorithm.
652
653       -colorspace <value>
654              the type of colorspace
655
656              Choices  are:  CineonLog,  CMYK,  GRAY,  HSL,  HWB,  OHTA,  RGB,
657              Rec601Luma, Rec709Luma, Rec601YCbCr,  Rec709YCbCr,  Transparent,
658              XYZ, YCbCr, YIQ, YPbPr, or YUV.
659
660              Color reduction, by default, takes place in the RGB color space.
661              Empirical evidence suggests that distances in color spaces  such
662              as  YUV  or  YIQ correspond to perceptual color differences more
663              closely than do distances in RGB space.  These color spaces  may
664              give  better  results  when  color  reducing an image.  Refer to
665              quantize for more details.  Two gray colorspaces are  supported.
666              The  Rec601Luma space is based on the recommendations for legacy
667              NTSC television (ITU-R BT.601-5).  The Rec709Luma space is based
668              on  the  recommendations  for  HDTV (Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5) and is
669              suitable for use with computer graphics,  and  for  contemporary
670              CRT   displays.   The  GRAY  colorspace  currently  selects  the
671              Rec601Luma colorspace by default for backwards  compatibly  rea‐
672              sons. This default may be re-considered in the future.
673
674              Two  YCbCr  colorspaces  are supported. The Rec601YCbCr space is
675              based on the recommendations for legacy NTSC  television  (ITU-R
676              BT.601-5).  The Rec709CbCr space is based on the recommendations
677              for HDTV (Rec.  ITU-R BT.709-5) and is suitable for suitable for
678              use  with  computer graphics, and for contemporary CRT displays.
679              The YCbCr colorspace specification is equivalent toRec601YCbCr.
680
681
682              The Transparent color space behaves uniquely  in  that  it  pre‐
683              serves the matte channel of the image if it exists.
684
685              The  -colors  or  -monochrome option, or saving to a file format
686              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
687              take effect.
688
689       -comment <string>
690              annotate an image with a comment
691
692              Use  this option to assign a specific comment to the image, when
693              writing to an image  format  that  supports  comments.  You  can
694              include  the image filename, type, width, height, or other image
695              attribute by embedding special format  characters  listed  under
696              the  -format option.  The comment is not drawn on the image, but
697              is embedded in the image datastream via a "Comment" tag or simi‐
698              lar  mechanism.   If  you  want the comment to be visible on the
699              image itself, use the -draw option instead.
700
701              For example,
702
703                   -comment "%m:%f %wx%h"
704
705
706              produces an image comment of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
707              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
708
709              If the first character of string is @, the image comment is read
710              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
711              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
712              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
713              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file could be incorporated in a
714              comment in the output file (a security risk).
715
716              If the -comment option appears multiple  times,  only  the  last
717              comment is stored.
718
719              In  PNG  images,  the  comment is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk
720              with the keyword "comment".
721
722       -compose <operator>
723              the type of image composition
724
725              The description of  composition  uses  abstract  terminology  in
726              order  to  allow  the  the  description  to be more clear, while
727              avoiding constant values which  are  specific  to  a  particular
728              build  configuration.  Each  image  pixel is represented by red,
729              green, and blue levels (which  are  equal  for  a  gray  pixel).
730              MaxRGB  is the maximum integral value which may be stored in the
731              red, green, or blue channels of the image. Each image pixel  may
732              also  optionally (if the image matte channel is enabled) have an
733              associated level of opacity (ranging from  opaque  to  transpar‐
734              ent),  which may be used to determine the influence of the pixel
735              color when compositing the pixel with another  image  pixel.  If
736              the  image  matte  channel  is  disabled, then all pixels in the
737              image are treated as opaque.  The color of an  opaque  pixel  is
738              fully  visible  while  the color of a transparent pixel color is
739              entirely absent (pixel color is ignored).
740
741              By definition, raster images have a rectangular shape. All image
742              rows  are  of  equal length, and all image columns have the same
743              number of rows. By treating the  opacity  channel  as  a  visual
744              "mask"  the rectangular image may be given a "shape" by treating
745              the opacity channel as a cookie-cutter  for  the  image.  Pixels
746              within  the shape are opaque, while pixels outside the shape are
747              transparent. Pixels on the boundary of the shape may be  between
748              opaque and transparent in order to provide antialiasing (visual‐
749              ly smooth edges). The description of the  composition  operators
750              use  this concept of image "shape" in order to make the descrip‐
751              tion of the operators easier to understand. While it  is  conve‐
752              nient to describe the operators in terms of "shapes" they are by
753              no means limited to mask-style operations since they  are  based
754              on  continuous  floating-point  mathematics  rather  than simple
755              boolean operations.
756
757              By default, the Over composite operator is used.  The  following
758              composite operators are available:
759
760                   Over
761                   In
762                   Out
763                   Atop
764                   Xor
765                   Plus
766                   Minus
767                   Add
768                   Subtract
769                   Difference
770                   Divide
771                   Multiply
772                   Bumpmap
773                   Copy
774                   CopyRed
775                   CopyGreen
776                   CopyBlue
777                   CopyOpacity
778                   CopyCyan
779                   CopyMagenta
780                   CopyYellow
781                   CopyBlack
782
783
784              The behavior of each operator is described below.
785
786
787               Over
788
789                    The result will be the union of the two image shapes, with
790                    opaque areas of change-image obscuring base-image  in  the
791                    region of overlap.
792
793               In
794
795                    The  result  is  simply  change-image  cut by the shape of
796                    base-image. None of the image data of base-image  will  be
797                    in the result.
798
799               Out
800
801                    The  resulting  image  is  change-image  with the shape of
802                    base-image cut out.
803
804               Atop
805
806                    The result is the same shape as base-image,  with  change-
807                    image obscuring base-image where the image shapes overlap.
808                    Note this differs from over because the portion of change-
809                    image  outside  base-image's  shape does not appear in the
810                    result.
811
812               Xor
813
814                    The result is the image data from  both  change-image  and
815                    base-image that is outside the overlap region. The overlap
816                    region will be blank.
817
818               Plus
819
820                    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output  val‐
821                    ues are cropped to MaxRGB (no overflow). This operation is
822                    independent of the matte channels.
823
824               Minus
825
826                    The result of change-image -  base-image,  with  underflow
827                    cropped  to  zero.  The  matte  channel is ignored (set to
828                    opaque, full coverage).
829
830               Add
831
832                    The result of change-image  +  base-image,  with  overflow
833                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1).
834
835               Subtract
836
837                    The  result  of  change-image - base-image, with underflow
838                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and subtract oper‐
839                    ators can be used to perform reversible transformations.
840
841               Difference
842
843                    The result of abs(change-image - base-image). This is use‐
844                    ful for comparing two very similar images.
845
846               Divide
847
848                    The result of change-image / base-image.  This  is  useful
849                    for  improving the readability of text on unevenly illumi‐
850                    nated photos (by using a gaussian blurred copy of  change-
851                    image as base-image).
852
853               Multiply
854
855                    The  result  of  change-image * base-image. This is useful
856                    for the creation of drop-shadows.
857
858               Bumpmap
859
860                    The result base-image shaded by change-image.
861
862               Copy
863
864                    The resulting image is base-image  replaced  with  change-
865                    image. Here the matte information is ignored.
866
867               CopyRed
868
869                    The  resulting  image  is  the  red  channel in base-image
870                    replaced with the red channel in change-image.  The  other
871                    channels are copied untouched.
872
873               CopyGreen
874
875                    The  resulting  image  is  the green channel in base-image
876                    replaced with the green channel in change-image. The other
877                    channels are copied untouched.
878
879               CopyBlue
880
881                    The  resulting  image  is  the  blue channel in base-image
882                    replaced with the blue channel in change-image. The  other
883                    channels are copied untouched.
884
885               CopyOpacity
886
887                    The  resulting  image is the opacity channel in base-image
888                    replaced with the opacity  channel  in  change-image.  The
889                    other channels are copied untouched.
890
891               CopyCyan
892
893                    The  resulting  image  is  the  cyan channel in base-image
894                    replaced with the cyan channel in change-image. The  other
895                    channels  are  copied  untouched.  Use  of  this  operator
896                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
897
898               CopyMagenta
899
900                    The resulting image is the magenta channel  in  base-image
901                    replaced  with  the  magenta  channel in change-image. The
902                    other channels are copied untouched. Use of this  operator
903                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
904
905               CopyYellow
906
907                    The  resulting  image  is the yellow channel in base-image
908                    replaced with the  yellow  channel  in  change-image.  The
909                    other  channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
910                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
911
912               CopyBlack
913
914                    The resulting image is the  black  channel  in  base-image
915                    replaced with the black channel in change-image. The other
916                    channels  are  copied  untouched.  Use  of  this  operator
917                    requires  that  base-image  be  in  CMYK(A) colorspace. If
918                    change-image is not in CMYK space, then  the  change-image
919                    pixel intensities are used.
920
921
922
923
924       -compress <type>
925              the type of image compression
926
927              Choices  are:  None,  BZip, Fax, Group3, Group4, JPEG, Lossless,
928              LZW, RLE, Zip, LZMA, JPEG2000, JPEG2000, JBIG, JBIG2,  WebP,  or
929              ZSTD.
930
931
932              Specify  +compress  to store the binary image in an uncompressed
933              format.  The default is the compression type  of  the  specified
934              image file.
935
936              "Lossless"  refers  to lossless JPEG, which is only available if
937              the JPEG library has been patched to support it. Use of lossless
938              JPEG is generally not recommended.
939
940              Use  the -quality option to set the compression level to be used
941              by the JPEG, JPEG-2000, PNG, MIFF, MPEG, and TIFF encoders.  Use
942              the  -sampling-factor  option  to  set the sampling factor to be
943              used by the DPX, JPEG, MPEG, and YUV encoders  for  downsampling
944              the chroma channels.
945
946       -contrast
947              enhance or reduce the image contrast
948
949              This  option  enhances  the  intensity  differences  between the
950              lighter and darker elements  of  the  image.  Use  -contrast  to
951              enhance the image or +contrast to reduce the image contrast.
952
953
954              For a more pronounced effect you can repeat the option:
955
956                  gm convert rose: -contrast -contrast rose_c2.png
957
958
959       -convolve <kernel>
960              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
961
962              The  kernel  is  specified as a comma-separated list of floating
963              point values, ordered left-to right, starting with the top  row.
964              The  order of the kernel is determined by the square root of the
965              number of entries.  Presently only square kernels are supported.
966
967       -create-directories
968              create output directory if required
969
970              Use this option with -output-directory if the input  paths  con‐
971              tain  subdirectories  and it is desired to create similar subdi‐
972              rectories in the output directory.  Without this option, mogrify
973              will fail if the required output directory does not exist.
974
975       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
976              preferred size and location of the cropped image
977
978              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
979
980              The  width  and  height  give the size of the image that remains
981              after cropping, and x and y are offsets that give  the  location
982              of  the top left corner of the cropped image with respect to the
983              original image.  To specify the amount to be removed, use -shave
984              instead.
985
986              If the x and y offsets are present, a single image is generated,
987              consisting of the pixels from the cropping region.  The  offsets
988              specify  the  location  of the upper left corner of the cropping
989              region measured downward and rightward with respect to the upper
990              left  corner  of  the  image.  If the -gravity option is present
991              with NorthEast, East, or SouthEast gravity, it  gives  the  dis‐
992              tance  leftward  from  the  right edge of the image to the right
993              edge of the cropping region.  Similarly, if the -gravity  option
994              is present with SouthWest, South, or SouthEast gravity, the dis‐
995              tance is measured upward between the bottom edges.
996
997              If the x and y offsets are omitted, a set of tiles of the speci‐
998              fied  geometry,  covering  the entire input image, is generated.
999              The rightmost tiles and the bottom  tiles  are  smaller  if  the
1000              specified  geometry  extends  beyond the dimensions of the input
1001              image.
1002
1003       -cycle <amount>
1004              displace image colormap by amount
1005
1006              Amount defines the  number  of  positions  each  colormap  entry
1007              isshifted.
1008
1009
1010       -debug <events>
1011              enable debug printout
1012
1013              The  events  parameter  specifies which events are to be logged.
1014              It can be either None, All, or a comma-separated list consisting
1015              of  one or more of the following domains: Annotate, Blob, Cache,
1016              Coder,  Configure,  Deprecate,  Error,  Exception,   FatalError,
1017              Information,  Locale,  Option,  Render, Resource, TemporaryFile,
1018              Transform, User.  Warning, or X11, For example, to log cache and
1019              blob events, use
1020
1021                  gm convert -debug "Cache,Blob" rose: rose.png
1022
1023
1024              The  "User"  domain  is  normally  empty, but developers can log
1025              "User" events in their private copy of GraphicsMagick.
1026
1027              Use the -log option to specify the format for debugging output.
1028
1029              Use +debug to turn off all logging.
1030
1031              An alternative to using -debug is to use the MAGICK_DEBUG  envi‐
1032              ronment  variable. The allowed values for the MAGICK_DEBUG envi‐
1033              ronment variable are the same as for the -debug option.
1034
1035       -deconstruct
1036              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
1037
1038              This option compares each image with the next in a sequence  and
1039              returns  the maximum bounding region of any pixel differences it
1040              discovers.  This method can undo a coalesced  sequence  returned
1041              by  the  -coalesce  option, and is useful for removing redundant
1042              information from a GIF or MNG animation.
1043
1044              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1045              option.   If  the  -deconstruct  option appears after all of the
1046              input images, all images are deconstructed.
1047
1048       -define <key>{=<value>},...
1049              add coder/decoder specific options This option  creates  one  or
1050              more  definitions  for  coders and decoders to use while reading
1051              and writing image data. Definitions may be passed to coders  and
1052              decoders  to  control options that are specific to certain image
1053              formats. If value is missing for a definition,  an  empty-valued
1054              definition  of  a  flag  will be created with that name. This is
1055              used to control on/off options. Use +define <key>,... to  remove
1056              definitions  previously  created.  Use +define "*" to remove all
1057              existing definitions.
1058
1059              The following definitions may be created:
1060
1061
1062               cineon:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1063
1064                    Use the cineon:colorspace option  when  reading  a  Cineon
1065                    file  to specify the colorspace the Cineon file uses. This
1066                    overrides the colorspace type implied by  the  DPX  header
1067                    (if any).
1068
1069               dpx:bits-per-sample=<value>
1070
1071                    If  the dpx:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1072                    will write DPX images with the specified bits per  sample,
1073                    overriding any existing depth value. If this option is not
1074                    specified, then the value is based on the  existing  image
1075                    depth value from the original image file. The DPX standard
1076                    supports bits per sample values of 1, 8, 10, 12,  and  16.
1077                    Many DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits with type
1078                    A padding (see below).
1079
1080               dpx:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1081
1082                    Use the dpx:colorspace option when reading a DPX  file  to
1083                    specify  the  colorspace the DPX file uses. This overrides
1084                    the colorspace type implied by the DPX header (if any).
1085
1086               dpx:packing-method={packed|a|b|lsbpad|msbpad}
1087
1088                    DPX samples are output within 32-bit words.  They  may  be
1089                    tightly  packed  end-to-end  within  the words ("packed"),
1090                    padded with null bits to the right of the sample  ("a"  or
1091                    "lsbpad"),  or  padded  with  null bits to the left of the
1092                    sample ("b" or "msbpad"). This option only has  an  effect
1093                    for  sample  sizes  of  10  or 12 bits. If samples are not
1094                    packed, the DPX standard recommends type A  padding.  Many
1095                    DPX  readers  demand  a sample size of 10 bits with type A
1096                    padding.
1097
1098               dpx:pixel-endian={lsb|msb}
1099
1100                    Allows the user to specify the endian order of the  pixels
1101                    when  reading  or writing the DPX files. Sometimes this is
1102                    useful if the file is (or must be) written incorrectly  so
1103                    that  the file header and the pixels use different endian‐
1104                    ness.
1105
1106               dpx:swap-samples={true|false}
1107
1108               dpx:swap-samples-read={true|false}
1109
1110               dpx:swap-samples-write={true|false}
1111
1112                    GraphicsMagick strives to adhere to the DPX  standard  but
1113                    certain aspects of the standard can be quite confusing. As
1114                    a result, some 10-bit DPX files have Red and  Blue  inter‐
1115                    changed,  or  Cb  and  Cr interchanged due to an different
1116                    interpretation of  the  standard,  or  getting  the  wires
1117                    crossed.  The  swap-samples  option  may  be supplied when
1118                    reading or writing in order to read  or  write  using  the
1119                    necessary  sample order.  Use swap-samples-read when swap‐
1120                    ping should only occur in  the  reader,  or  swap-samples-
1121                    write when swapping should only occur in the writer.
1122
1123               gradient:direction={South|North|West|East|NorthWest|North‐
1124               East|SouthWest|SouthEast}
1125
1126                    By default, the gradient coder produces  a  gradient  from
1127                    top to bottom ("South").  Since GraphicsMagick 1.3.35, the
1128                    gradient direction may be specified  to  produce  gradient
1129                    vectors  according  to  a gravity-like specification.  The
1130                    arguments are South (Top  to  Bottom),  North  (Bottom  to
1131                    Top),  West  (Right to Left), East (Left to Right), North‐
1132                    West (Bottom-Right to Top-Left), NorthEast (Bottom-Left to
1133                    Top-Right),  SouthWest (Top-Right Bottom-Left), and South‐
1134                    East (Top-Left to Bottom-Right).
1135
1136               jp2:rate=<value>
1137
1138                    Specify  the  compression  factor  to  use  while  writing
1139                    JPEG-2000  files. The compression factor is the reciprocal
1140                    of the compression ratio. The valid range is 0.0  to  1.0,
1141                    with 1.0 indicating lossless compression. If defined, this
1142                    value overrides the -quality setting. The default  quality
1143                    setting of 75 results in a rate value of 0.06641.
1144
1145               jpeg:block-smoothing={true|false}
1146
1147                    Enables  or  disables  block smoothing when reading a JPEG
1148                    file (default enabled).
1149
1150               jpeg:dct-method=<value>
1151
1152                    Selects the IJG JPEG library DCT  implementation  to  use.
1153                    The  encoding  implementations  vary in speed and encoding
1154                    error. The available choices for value are  islow,  ifast,
1155                    float,  default  and  fastest. Note that fastest might not
1156                    necessarily be fastest  on  your  CPU,  depending  on  the
1157                    choices  made when the JPEG library was built and how your
1158                    CPU behaves.
1159
1160               jpeg:fancy-upsampling={true|false}
1161
1162                    Enables or disables fancy upsampling when reading  a  JPEG
1163                    file (default enabled).
1164
1165               jpeg:max-scan-number=<value>
1166
1167                    Specifies  an integer value for the maximum number of pro‐
1168                    gressive scans allowed in a JPEG file.  The default  maxi‐
1169                    mum is 100 scans.  This limit is imposed due to a weakness
1170                    in the JPEG standard which allows small JPEG files to take
1171                    many minutes or hours to be read.
1172
1173               jpeg:max-warnings=<value>
1174
1175                    Specifies  an  integer  value  for  how  many warnings are
1176                    allowed for any given error type before being promoted  to
1177                    a  hard  error.   JPEG  files producing excessive warnings
1178                    indicate a problem with the file.
1179
1180               jpeg:optimize-coding={true|false}
1181
1182                    Selects if huffman encoding should be used. Huffman encod‐
1183                    ing  is  enabled  by default, but may be disabled for very
1184                    large images since it encoding requires  that  the  entire
1185                    image  be  buffered  in  memory. Huffman encoding produces
1186                    smaller JPEG files at the  expense  of  added  compression
1187                    time and memory consumption.
1188
1189               jpeg:preserve-settings
1190
1191                    If  the  jpeg:preserve-settings  flag is defined, the JPEG
1192                    encoder will use the same "quality" and  "sampling-factor"
1193                    settings  that  were found in the input file, if the input
1194                    was in JPEG format. These settings are also  preserved  if
1195                    the input is a JPEG file and the output is a JNG file.  If
1196                    the colorspace of the output file differs from that of the
1197                    input  file, the quality setting is preserved but the sam‐
1198                    pling-factors are not.
1199
1200               pcl:fit-to-page
1201
1202                    If the pcl:fit-to-page flag is defined, then  the  printer
1203                    is  requested  to  scale  the  image  to fit the page size
1204                    (width and/or height).
1205               mng:maximum-loops=<value>
1206
1207                    mng:maximum-loops specifies the maximum  number  of  loops
1208                    allowed  to  be  specified by a MNG LOOP chunk. Without an
1209                    imposed limit, a MNG file could request up  to  2147483647
1210                    loops,  which could run for a very long time.  The current
1211                    default limit is 512 loops.
1212
1213               pdf:use-cropbox={true|false}
1214
1215                    If the pdf:use-cropbox flag is set to  true,  then  Ghost‐
1216                    script is requested to apply the PDF crop box.
1217
1218               pdf:stop-on-error={true|false}
1219
1220                    If  the pdf:stop-on-error flag is set to true, then Ghost‐
1221                    script is requested to stop processing the  PDF  when  the
1222                    first  error is encountered.  Otherwise it will attempt to
1223                    process all requested pages.
1224
1225               ps:imagemask
1226
1227                    If the ps:imagemask flag is  defined,  the  PS3  and  EPS3
1228                    coders  will  create  Postscript files that render bilevel
1229                    images with the Postscript imagemask operator  instead  of
1230                    the image operator.
1231
1232               ptif:minimum-geometry=<geometry>
1233
1234                    If  the ptif:minimum-geometry key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1235                    ick will use it to determine the  minimum  frame  size  to
1236                    output  when writing a pyramid TIFF file (a TIFF file con‐
1237                    taining a succession of  reduced  versions  of  the  first
1238                    frame). The default minimum geometry is 32x32.
1239
1240               tiff:alpha={unspecified|associated|unassociated}
1241
1242                    Specify  the TIFF alpha channel type when reading or writ‐
1243                    ing TIFF files, overriding the normal value.  The  default
1244                    alpha  channel  type  for  new files is unspecified alpha.
1245                    Existing alpha settings are preserved when converting from
1246                    one TIFF file to another. When a TIFF file uses associated
1247                    alpha, the image pixels are pre-multiplied (i.e.  altered)
1248                    with  the  alpha  channel.  Files  with "associated" alpha
1249                    appear as if they were alpha composited on a  black  back‐
1250                    ground  when the matte channel is disabled. If the unasso‐
1251                    ciated alpha type is selected, then the alpha  channel  is
1252                    saved  without  altering  the pixels. Photoshop recognizes
1253                    associated alpha as transparency information, if the  file
1254                    is saved with unassociated alpha, the alpha information is
1255                    loaded as an independent  channel.   Note  that  for  many
1256                    years, ImageMagick and GraphicsMagick marked TIFF files as
1257                    using associated alpha, without  properly  pre-multiplying
1258                    the pixels.
1259
1260               tiff:fill-order={msb2lsb|lsb2msb}
1261
1262                    If the tiff:fill-order key is defined, GraphicsMagick will
1263                    use it to determine the bit fill order used while  writing
1264                    TIFF files. The normal default is "msb2lsb", which matches
1265                    the native bit order of all modern CPUs. The  only  excep‐
1266                    tion  to  this is when Group3 or Group4 FAX compression is
1267                    requested since FAX machines  send  data  in  bit-reversed
1268                    order  and  therefore  RFC  2301  recommends using reverse
1269                    order.
1270
1271               tiff:group-three-options=<value>
1272
1273                    If the tiff:group-three-options key is defined,  Graphics‐
1274                    Magick  will  use  it  to  set the group3 options tag when
1275                    writing group3-compressed TIFF.  Please see the TIFF spec‐
1276                    ification for the usage of this tag.  The default value is
1277                    4.
1278
1279               tiff:ignore-tags=<tags>
1280
1281                    If the tiff:ignore-tags key is defined, then it is used as
1282                    a  list  of  comma-delimited  integer  TIFF  tag values to
1283                    ignore while reading the TIFF file.   This  is  useful  in
1284                    order  to be able to read files which which otherwise fail
1285                    to read due to problems with TIFF tags.   Note  that  some
1286                    TIFF  tags  are  required  in order to be able to read the
1287                    image data at all.
1288
1289               tiff:report-warnings={false|true}
1290
1291                    If the tiff:report-warnings key  is  defined  and  set  to
1292                    true,  then TIFF warnings are reported as a warning excep‐
1293                    tion rather than as a coder log  message.   Such  warnings
1294                    are  reported  after  the  image has been read or written.
1295                    Most TIFF warnings are benign but sometimes they may  help
1296                    deduce  problems  with  the TIFF file, or help detect that
1297                    the TIFF file requires a special application to read  suc‐
1298                    cessfully  due  to  the  use of proprietary or specialized
1299                    extensions.
1300
1301               tiff:sample-format={unsigned|ieeefp}
1302
1303                    If the tiff:sample-format key is  defined,  GraphicsMagick
1304                    will  use  it  to  determine  the sample format used while
1305                    writing TIFF files. The  default  is  "unsigned".  Specify
1306                    "ieeefp"  in order to write floating-point TIFF files with
1307                    float  (32-bit)  or  double  (64-bit)  values.   Use   the
1308                    tiff:bits-per-sample  define  to  determine  the  type  of
1309                    floating-point value to use.
1310
1311               tiff:max-sample-value=<value>
1312
1313                    If the tiff:max-sample-value key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1314                    ick  will  use  the assigned value as the maximum floating
1315                    point value while reading or writing IEEE  floating  point
1316                    TIFFs.  Otherwise  the  maximum  value is 1.0 or the value
1317                    obtained from the file's SMaxSampleValue tag (if present).
1318                    The  floating  point  data  is  currently  not  scanned in
1319                    advance to determine a best maximum sample value so if the
1320                    range  is  not  1.0,  or  the  SMaxSampleValue  tag is not
1321                    present, it may be necessary to (intelligently)  use  this
1322                    parameter to properly read a file.
1323
1324               tiff:min-sample-value=<value>
1325
1326                    If  the tiff:min-sample-value key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1327                    ick will use the assigned value as  the  minimum  floating
1328                    point  value  while reading or writing IEEE floating point
1329                    TIFFs. Otherwise the minimum value is  0.0  or  the  value
1330                    obtained from the file's SMinSampleValue tag (if present).
1331
1332               tiff:bits-per-sample=<value>
1333
1334                    If the tiff:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1335                    will write images with  the  specified  bits  per  sample,
1336                    overriding  any  existing depth value. Value may be any in
1337                    the range of 1 to 32, or 64 when  the  default  ´unsigned'
1338                    format  is  written,  or  16/32/24/64  if IEEEFP format is
1339                    written.  Please note that the baseline TIFF 6.0  specifi‐
1340                    cation  only  requires readers to handle certain powers of
1341                    two, and the values to be handled depend on the nature  of
1342                    the image (e.g. colormapped, grayscale, RGB, CMYK).
1343
1344               tiff:samples-per-pixel=<value>
1345
1346                    If  the  tiff:samples-per-pixel key is defined to a value,
1347                    the TIFF coder will write TIFF  images  with  the  defined
1348                    samples  per  pixel,  overriding  any  value stored in the
1349                    image. This option should not normally be used.
1350
1351               tiff:rows-per-strip=<value>
1352
1353                    Allows the user to specify the number  of  rows  per  TIFF
1354                    strip.   Rounded  up  to  a multiple of 16 when using JPEG
1355                    compression. Ignored when using tiles.
1356
1357               tiff:strip-per-page=true
1358
1359                    Requests that the image is written in a single TIFF strip.
1360                    This  is  normally  the default when group3 or group4 com‐
1361                    pression is requested within reasonable limits. Requesting
1362                    a  single strip for large images may result in failure due
1363                    to resource consumption in the writer or reader.
1364
1365               tiff:tile
1366
1367                    Enable writing tiled TIFF (rather than stripped) using the
1368                    default  tile  size.  Tiled TIFF organizes the image as an
1369                    array of smaller images (tiles) in order to enable  random
1370                    access.
1371
1372               tiff:tile-geometry=<width>x<height>
1373
1374                    Specify  the  tile  size  to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1375                    Width and height should be a multiple of 16. If the  value
1376                    is  not  a  multiple  of 16, then it will be rounded down.
1377                    Enables tiled TIFF if it has  not  already  been  enabled.
1378                    GraphicsMagick  does  not  use tiled storage internally so
1379                    tiles need to be converted back and forth from the  inter‐
1380                    nal  scanline-oriented  storage  to tile-oriented storage.
1381                    Testing with typical RGB images shows that  useful  square
1382                    tile  size  values  range from 128x128 to 1024x1024. Large
1383                    images which require using a disk-based pixel cache  bene‐
1384                    fit from large tile sizes while images which fit in memory
1385                    work well with smaller tile sizes.
1386
1387               tiff:tile-width=<width>
1388
1389                    Specify the tile width to use while  writing  tiled  TIFF.
1390                    The  tile height is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1391                    Width should be a multiple of 16. If the value  is  not  a
1392                    multiple  of  16,  then  it will be rounded down.  Enables
1393                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1394
1395               tiff:tile-height=<height>
1396
1397                    Specify the tile height to use while writing  tiled  TIFF.
1398                    The  tile  width is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1399                    Height should be a multiple of 16. If the value is  not  a
1400                    multiple  of  16,  then  it will be rounded down.  Enables
1401                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1402
1403               tiff:webp-lossless={TRUE|FALSE}
1404
1405                    Specify a value of TRUE  to  enable  lossless  mode  while
1406                    writing WebP-compressed TIFF files. The WebP webp:lossless
1407                    option may also be used.  The quality factor  set  by  the
1408                    -quality  option  may  be  used  to influence the level of
1409                    effort expended while compressing.
1410
1411               tiff:zstd-compress-level=<value>
1412
1413                    Specify the compression level to use while  writing  Zstd-
1414                    compressed TIFF files. The valid range is 1 to 22. If this
1415                    define is not specified, then the 'quality' value is  used
1416                    such  that the default quality setting of 75 is translated
1417                    to a compress level of 9 such that ´quality' has a  useful
1418                    range of 10-184 if used for this purpose.
1419
1420               webp:lossless={true|false}
1421
1422                    Enable lossless encoding.
1423
1424               webp:method={0-6}
1425
1426                    Quality/speed trade-off.
1427
1428               webp:image-hint={default,graph,photo,picture}
1429
1430                    Hint for image type.
1431
1432               webp:target-size=<integer>
1433
1434                    Target size in bytes.
1435
1436               webp:target-psnr=<float>
1437
1438                    Minimal distortion to try to achieve.
1439
1440               webp:segments={1-4}
1441
1442                    Maximum number of segments to use.
1443
1444               webp:sns-strength={0-100}
1445
1446                    Spatial Noise Shaping.
1447
1448               webp:filter-strength={0-100}
1449
1450                    Filter strength.
1451
1452               webp:filter-sharpness={0-7}
1453
1454                    Filter sharpness.
1455
1456               webp:filter-type={0,1}
1457
1458                    Filtering  type. 0 = simple, 1 = strong (only used if fil‐
1459                    ter-strength > 0 or autofilter is enabled).
1460
1461               webp:auto-filter={true|false}
1462
1463                    Auto adjust filter's strength.
1464
1465               webp:alpha-compression=<integer>
1466
1467                    Algorithm for encoding the alpha plane (0 = none, 1 = com‐
1468                    pressed with WebP lossless). Default is 1.
1469
1470               webp:alpha-filtering=<integer>
1471
1472                    Predictive  filtering  method for alpha plane. 0: none, 1:
1473                    fast, 2: best. Default is 1.
1474
1475               webp:alpha-quality={0-100}
1476
1477                    Between 0 (smallest size) and 100 (lossless).  Default  is
1478                    100.
1479
1480               webp:pass=[1..10]
1481
1482                    Number of entropy-analysis passes.
1483
1484               webp:show-compressed={true|false}
1485
1486                    Export  the compressed picture back.  In-loop filtering is
1487                    not applied.
1488
1489               webp:preprocessing=[0,1,2]
1490
1491                    0=none, 1=segment-smooth, 2=pseudo-random dithering
1492
1493               webp:partitions=[0-3]
1494
1495                    log2(number of token partitions) in [0..3].  Default is  0
1496                    for easier progressive decoding.
1497
1498               webp:partition-limit={0-100}
1499
1500                    Quality  degradation allowed to fit the 512k limit on pre‐
1501                    diction modes coding (0: no degradation, 100: maximum pos‐
1502                    sible degradation).
1503
1504               webp:emulate-jpeg-size={true|false}
1505
1506                    If true, compression parameters will be remapped to better
1507                    match the expected output size from JPEG compression. Gen‐
1508                    erally,  the  output size will be similar but the degrada‐
1509                    tion will be lower.
1510
1511               webp:thread-level=<integer>
1512
1513                    If non-zero, try and use multi-threaded encoding.
1514
1515               webp:low-memory={true|false}
1516
1517                    If set, reduce memory usage (but increase CPU use)
1518
1519               webp:use-sharp-yuv={true|false}
1520
1521                    If set, if needed, use sharp (and slow)  RGB->YUV  conver‐
1522                    sion
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527               For  example, to create a postscript file that will render only
1528               the black pixels of a bilevel image, use:
1529
1530                   gm convert bilevel.tif -define ps:imagemask eps3:stencil.ps
1531
1532
1533       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
1534              display the next image after pausing
1535
1536              This option is useful for  regulating  the  animation  of  image
1537              sequences  Delay/100  seconds  must expire before the display of
1538              the next image. The default is no delay between each showing  of
1539              the image sequence. The maximum delay is 65535.
1540
1541              You  can  specify  a delay range (e.g. -delay 10-500) which sets
1542              the minimum and maximum delay.
1543
1544       -density <width>x<height>
1545              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the  image  This
1546              option  specifies the image resolution to store while encoding a
1547              raster image or the canvas resolution while rendering  (reading)
1548              vector  formats  such  as  Postscript,  PDF, WMF, and SVG into a
1549              raster image. Image resolution provides the unit of  measure  to
1550              apply  when  rendering  to an output device or raster image. The
1551              default unit of measure is in dots per inch  (DPI).  The  -units
1552              option may be used to select dots per centimeter instead.
1553               The default resolution is 72 dots per inch, which is equivalent
1554              to one point per pixel (Macintosh and Postscript standard). Com‐
1555              puter screens are normally 72 or 96 dots per inch while printers
1556              typically support 150, 300, 600,  or  1200  dots  per  inch.  To
1557              determine the resolution of your display, use a ruler to measure
1558              the width of your screen in inches, and divide by the number  of
1559              horizontal  pixels  (1024  on  a 1024x768 display).  If the file
1560              format supports it, this option may be used to update the stored
1561              image  resolution.  Note that Photoshop stores and obtains image
1562              resolution from a proprietary embedded profile. If this  profile
1563              is  not stripped from the image, then Photoshop will continue to
1564              treat the image using its former resolution, ignoring the  image
1565              resolution  specified  in the standard file header.  The density
1566              option is an attribute and does not alter the underlying  raster
1567              image.  It  may  be used to adjust the rendered size for desktop
1568              publishing purposes by adjusting the scale applied to  the  pix‐
1569              els.  To  resize the image so that it is the same size at a dif‐
1570              ferent resolution, use the -resample option.
1571
1572       -depth <value>
1573              depth of the image
1574
1575              This is the number of bits of color to preserve  in  the  image.
1576              Any value between 1 and QuantumDepth (build option) may be spec‐
1577              ified, although 8 or 16 are the most  common  values.  Use  this
1578              option to specify the depth of raw images whose depth is unknown
1579              such as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK, or to change the depth of any  image
1580              after it has been read.  The depth option is applied to the pix‐
1581              els immediately so it may be used as a form of  simple  compres‐
1582              sion  by  discarding  the  least  significant bits. Reducing the
1583              depth in advance may speed up color quantization, and help  cre‐
1584              ate  smaller  file sizes when using a compression algorithm like
1585              LZW or ZIP.
1586
1587       -descend
1588              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
1589
1590       -despeckle
1591              reduce the speckles within an image
1592
1593       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
1594              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
1595
1596              With this option, composite image is used as a displacement map.
1597              Black,  within  the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
1598              placement.  White is a maximum negative displacement and  middle
1599              gray  is  neutral.   The displacement is scaled to determine the
1600              pixel shift.  By default, the displacement applies in  both  the
1601              horizontal  and  vertical  directions.   However, if you specify
1602              mask, composite image is the horizontal X displacement and  mask
1603              the vertical Y displacement.
1604
1605       -display <host:display[.screen]>
1606              specifies the X server to contact
1607
1608              This  option  is  used  with convert for obtaining image or font
1609              from this X server.  See X(1).
1610
1611       -dispose <method>
1612              GIF disposal method
1613
1614              The Disposal Method indicates the way in which the graphic is to
1615              be treated after being displayed.
1616
1617              Here are the valid methods:
1618
1619                  Undefined       No disposal specified.
1620                  None            Do not dispose between frames.
1621                  Background      Overwrite the image area with
1622                                  the background color.
1623                  Previous        Overwrite the image area with
1624                                  what was there prior to rendering
1625                                  the image.
1626
1627
1628       -dissolve <percent>
1629              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
1630
1631              The  opacity  of  the composite image is multiplied by the given
1632              percent, then it is composited over the main image.
1633
1634       -dither
1635              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
1636
1637              The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity resolution
1638              for  spatial  resolution by averaging the intensities of several
1639              neighboring pixels.  Images which suffer from severe  contouring
1640              when reducing colors can be improved with this option.
1641
1642              The -colors or -monochrome option is required for this option to
1643              take effect.
1644
1645              Use +dither to turn off dithering and to render PostScript with‐
1646              out text or graphic aliasing. Disabling dithering often (but not
1647              always) leads to decreased processing time.
1648
1649       -draw <string>
1650              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
1651
1652              Use this option to annotate an image with one  or  more  graphic
1653              primitives.   The  primitives  include shapes, text, transforma‐
1654              tions, and pixel operations.  The shape primitives are
1655
1656                   point           x,y
1657                   line            x0,y0 x1,y1
1658                   rectangle       x0,y0 x1,y1
1659                   roundRectangle  x0,y0 x1,y1 wc,hc
1660                   arc             x0,y0 x1,y1 a0,a1
1661                   ellipse         x0,y0 rx,ry a0,a1
1662                   circle          x0,y0 x1,y1
1663                   polyline        x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1664                   polygon         x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1665                   Bezier          x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1666                   path            path specification
1667                   image           operator x0,y0 w,h filename
1668
1669
1670              The text primitive is
1671
1672                   text            x0,y0 string
1673
1674
1675              The text gravity primitive is
1676
1677                   gravity         NorthWest, North, NorthEast, West, Center,
1678                                   East, SouthWest, South, or SouthEast
1679
1680
1681              The text gravity primitive only affects the  placement  of  text
1682              and  does not interact with the other primitives.  It is equiva‐
1683              lent to using the -gravity commandline option, except that it is
1684              limited in scope to the -draw option in which it appears.
1685
1686              The transformation primitives are
1687
1688                   rotate          degrees
1689                   translate       dx,dy
1690                   scale           sx,sy
1691                   skewX           degrees
1692                   skewY           degrees
1693
1694
1695              The pixel operation primitives are
1696
1697                   color           x0,y0 method
1698                   matte           x0,y0 method
1699
1700
1701              The  shape  primitives  are  drawn in the color specified in the
1702              preceding -stroke option. Except for the line and  point  primi‐
1703              tives, they are filled with the color specified in the preceding
1704              -fill option.  For unfilled shapes, use -fill none.
1705
1706              Point requires a single coordinate.
1707
1708              Line requires a start and end coordinate.
1709
1710              Rectangle expects an upper left and lower right coordinate.
1711
1712              RoundRectangle has the upper left and  lower  right  coordinates
1713              and the width and height of the corners.
1714
1715              Circle  has  a  center coordinate and a coordinate for the outer
1716              edge.
1717
1718              Use Arc to inscribe an elliptical arc within a rectangle.   Arcs
1719              require  a start and end point as well as the degree of rotation
1720              (e.g. 130,30 200,100 45,90).
1721
1722              Use Ellipse to draw a partial  ellipse  centered  at  the  given
1723              point with the x-axis and y-axis radius and start and end of arc
1724              in degrees (e.g. 100,100 100,150 0,360).
1725
1726              Finally, polyline and polygon require three or more  coordinates
1727              to define its boundaries.  Coordinates are integers separated by
1728              an optional comma.  For example, to define a circle centered  at
1729              100,100 that extends to 150,150 use:
1730
1731                   -draw 'circle 100,100 150,150'
1732
1733
1734              Paths  (See  Paths)  represent  an outline of an object which is
1735              defined in terms of moveto (set a  new  current  point),  lineto
1736              (draw  a  straight  line),  curveto  (draw a curve using a cubic
1737              Bezier), arc (elliptical or circular arc) and  closepath  (close
1738              the  current  shape  by  drawing a line to the last moveto) ele‐
1739              ments. Compound paths (i.e., a path with subpaths, each consist‐
1740              ing  of  a  single  moveto followed by one or more line or curve
1741              operations) are possible to allow effects such as "donut  holes"
1742              in objects.
1743
1744              Use  image  to composite an image with another image. Follow the
1745              image keyword with the composite operator, image location, image
1746              size, and filename:
1747
1748                   -draw 'image Over 100,100 225,225 image.jpg'
1749
1750
1751              You  can  use  0,0  for  the  image size, which means to use the
1752              actual dimensions found in the image header. Otherwise, it  will
1753              be  scaled to the given dimensions.  See -compose for a descrip‐
1754              tion of the composite operators.
1755
1756              Use text to annotate an image with text. Follow the text coordi‐
1757              nates  with a string. If the string has embedded spaces, enclose
1758              it in single or double quotes. Optionally you  can  include  the
1759              image filename, type, width, height, or other image attribute by
1760              embedding special format character. See -comment for details.
1761
1762              For example,
1763
1764
1765                   -draw 'text 100,100 "%m:%f %wx%h"'
1766
1767
1768              annotates the image with MIFF:bird.miff  512x480  for  an  image
1769              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
1770
1771              If  the  first character of string is @, the text is read from a
1772              file titled by the remaining characters in the  string.   Please
1773              note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source that it
1774              should be sanitized before use (a security risk).
1775
1776              Rotate rotates subsequent shape primitives and  text  primitives
1777              about  the  origin of the main image. If the -region option pre‐
1778              cedes the -draw option, the origin for  transformations  is  the
1779              upper left corner of the region.
1780
1781              Translate translates them.
1782
1783              Scale scales them.
1784
1785              SkewX and SkewY skew them with respect to the origin of the main
1786              image or the region.
1787
1788              The transformations modify the current affine matrix,  which  is
1789              initialized  from  the  initial  affine  matrix  defined  by the
1790              -affine option.  Transformations are cumulative within the -draw
1791              option.   The initial affine matrix is not affected; that matrix
1792              is only changed by the appearance of another -affine option.  If
1793              another  -draw  option  appears,  the  current  affine matrix is
1794              reinitialized from the initial affine matrix.
1795
1796              Use color to change the color of a pixel to the fill color  (see
1797              -fill). Follow the pixel coordinate with a method:
1798
1799                   point
1800                   replace
1801                   floodfill
1802                   filltoborder
1803                   reset
1804
1805
1806              Consider  the target pixel as that specified by your coordinate.
1807              The point method recolors the target pixel. The  replace  method
1808              recolors  any  pixel that matches the color of the target pixel.
1809              Floodfill recolors any pixel that matches the color of the  tar‐
1810              get  pixel  and is a neighbor, whereas filltoborder recolors any
1811              neighbor pixel that is not  the  border  color.  Finally,  reset
1812              recolors all pixels.
1813
1814              Use  matte  to  the change the pixel matte value to transparent.
1815              Follow the pixel coordinate with a method (see the color  primi‐
1816              tive for a description of methods). The point method changes the
1817              matte value of the target pixel. The replace method changes  the
1818              matte  value  of  any pixel that matches the color of the target
1819              pixel. Floodfill changes the  matte  value  of  any  pixel  that
1820              matches the color of the target pixel and is a neighbor, whereas
1821              filltoborder changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel  that
1822              is  not  the border color (-bordercolor).  Finally reset changes
1823              the matte value of all pixels.
1824
1825              You can set the primitive color, font,  and  font  bounding  box
1826              color with -fill, -font, and -box respectively. Options are pro‐
1827              cessed in command line order so be sure  to  use  these  options
1828              before the -draw option.
1829
1830       -edge <radius>
1831              detect edges within an image
1832
1833       -emboss <radius>
1834              emboss an image
1835
1836       -encoding <type>
1837              specify the text encoding
1838
1839              Choose from AdobeCustom, AdobeExpert, AdobeStandard, AppleRoman,
1840              BIG5, GB2312, Latin 2, None, SJIScode, Symbol, Unicode, Wansung.
1841
1842       -endian <type>
1843              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
1844
1845              MSB indicates big-endian (e.g. SPARC, Motorola  68K)  while  LSB
1846              indicates  little-endian  (e.g.  Intel 'x86, VAX) byte ordering.
1847              Native indicates to use the normal ordering for the current CPU.
1848              This  option currently only influences the CMYK, DPX, GRAY, RGB,
1849              and TIFF, formats.
1850
1851              Use +endian to revert to unspecified endianness.
1852
1853       -enhance
1854              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
1855
1856       -equalize
1857              perform histogram equalization to the image
1858
1859       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
1860              composite image on background color canvas image
1861
1862              This option composites the  image  on  a  new  background  color
1863              (-background)  canvas image of size <width>x<height>. The exist‐
1864              ing image content is composited at  the  position  specified  by
1865              geometry  x and y offset and/or desired gravity (-gravity) using
1866              the current image  compose  (-compose)  method.   Image  content
1867              which  falls  outside  the bounds of the new image dimensions is
1868              discarded.
1869
1870              For example, this command creates a thumbnail of an  image,  and
1871              centers  it on a red color backdrop image, offsetting the canvas
1872              ten pixels to the left and five pixels up, with respect  to  the
1873              thumbnail:
1874
1875                  gm  convert  infile.jpg  -thumbnail  120x80  -background red
1876              -gravity center \
1877                            -extent 140x100-10-5 outfile.jpg
1878
1879
1880              This command reduces or expands  a  JPEG  image  to  fit  on  an
1881              800x600 display:
1882
1883                  gm convert -size 800x600 input.jpg \
1884                            -resize 800x600 -background black \
1885                            -compose Copy -gravity center \
1886                            -extent 800x600 \
1887                            -quality 92 output.jpg
1888
1889
1890              If  the  aspect ratio of the input image isn't exactly 4:3, then
1891              the image is centered on an 800x600 black canvas.
1892
1893       -file <filename>
1894              write annotated difference image to file
1895
1896              If -file is specified, then an  annotated  difference  image  is
1897              generated and written to the specified file. Pixels which differ
1898              between the reference and compare images are modified from those
1899              in  the  compare  image  so  that the changed pixels become more
1900              obvious.  Some images may require use of  an  alternative  high‐
1901              light  style  (see  -highlight-style)  or  highlight  color (see
1902              -highlight-color) before the changes are obvious.
1903
1904       -fill <color>
1905              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
1906
1907              Colors are represented in GraphicsMagick in the same  form  used
1908              by SVG. Use "gm convert -list color" to list named colors:
1909
1910                  name               (named color)
1911                  #RGB               (hex numbers, 4 bits each)
1912                  #RRGGBB            (8 bits each)
1913                  #RRRGGGBBB         (12 bits each)
1914                  #RRRRGGGGBBBB      (16 bits each)
1915                  #RGBA              (4 bits each)
1916                  #RRGGBBAA          (8 bits each)
1917                  #RRRGGGBBBAAA      (12 bits each)
1918                  #RRRRGGGGBBBBAAAA  (16 bits each)
1919                  rgb(r,g,b)         (r,g,b are decimal numbers)
1920                  rgba(r,g,b,a)      (r,g,b,a are decimal numbers)
1921
1922
1923              Enclose  the  color  specification in quotation marks to prevent
1924              the "#" or the parentheses from being interpreted by your shell.
1925
1926              For example,
1927
1928                  gm convert -fill blue ...
1929                  gm convert -fill "#ddddff" ...
1930                  gm convert -fill "rgb(65000,65000,65535)" ...
1931
1932
1933              The shorter forms are scaled up, if  necessary  by  replication.
1934              For  example,  #3af,  #33aaff, and #3333aaaaffff are all equiva‐
1935              lent.
1936
1937              See -draw for further details.
1938
1939       -filter <type>
1940              use this type of filter when resizing an image
1941
1942              Use this option to affect the resizing  operation  of  an  image
1943              (see -geometry).  Choose from these filters (ordered by approxi‐
1944              mate increasing CPU time):
1945
1946                   Point
1947                   Box
1948                   Triangle
1949                   Hermite
1950                   Hanning
1951                   Hamming
1952                   Blackman
1953                   Gaussian
1954                   Quadratic
1955                   Cubic
1956                   Catrom
1957                   Mitchell
1958                   Lanczos
1959                   Bessel
1960                   Sinc
1961
1962
1963              The default filter is automatically selected to provide the best
1964              quality  while  consuming  a  reasonable  amount  of  time.  The
1965              Mitchell filter is used if the image supports  a  palette,  sup‐
1966              ports a matte channel, or is being enlarged, otherwise the Lanc‐
1967              zos filter is used.
1968
1969       -flatten
1970              flatten a sequence of images
1971
1972              In some file formats (e.g. Photoshop's PSD) complex  images  may
1973              be  represented  by  "layers" (independent images) which must be
1974              composited in order to obtain the final rendition.  The -flatten
1975              option accomplishes this composition.  The sequence of images is
1976              replaced by a single image created by compositing each image  in
1977              turn,  while  respecting composition operators and page offsets.
1978              While -flatten is immediately useful for eliminating layers,  it
1979              is also useful as a general-purpose composition tool.
1980
1981              The  sequence  of  images is terminated by the appearance of any
1982              option.  If the -flatten option appears after all of  the  input
1983              images,  all  images  are  flattened.  Also see -mosaic which is
1984              similar to -flatten except that it adds a suitably-sized  canvas
1985              base image.
1986
1987              For example, this composites an image on top of a 640x400 trans‐
1988              parent black canvas image:
1989
1990                  gm convert -size 640x300 xc:transparent \
1991                            -compose over -page +0-100 \
1992                            frame.png -flatten output.png
1993
1994
1995              and this flattens a Photoshop PSD file:
1996
1997                  gm convert input.psd -flatten output.png
1998
1999
2000       -flip  create a "mirror image"
2001
2002              reflect the scanlines in the vertical direction.
2003
2004       -flop  create a "mirror image"
2005
2006              reflect the scanlines in the horizontal direction.
2007
2008       -font <name>
2009              use this font when annotating the image with text
2010
2011              You can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript,  True‐
2012              Type,  or  X11 font.  For example, Arial.ttf is a TrueType font,
2013              ps:helvetica is PostScript, and x:fixed is X11.
2014
2015       -foreground <color>
2016              define the foreground color
2017
2018              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
2019              -fill option.
2020
2021       -format <type>
2022              the image format type
2023
2024              When used with the mogrify utility, this option will convert any
2025              image to the image format you  specify.   See  GraphicsMagick(1)
2026              for a list of image format types supported by GraphicsMagick, or
2027              see the output of 'gm -list format'.
2028
2029              By default the file is written to its original  name.   However,
2030              if the filename extension matches a supported format, the exten‐
2031              sion is replaced with the image format type specified with -for‐
2032              mat.   For  example,  if you specify tiff as the format type and
2033              the input image filename is image.gif, the output image filename
2034              becomes image.tiff.
2035
2036       -format <string>
2037              output formatted image characteristics
2038
2039              When used with the identify utility, or the convert utility with
2040              output written to the  'info:-'  file  specification,  use  this
2041              option  to print information about the image in a format of your
2042              choosing.  You can include  the  image  filename,  type,  width,
2043              height,  Exif  data, or other image attributes by embedding spe‐
2044              cial format characters:
2045
2046                   %b   file size
2047                   %c   comment
2048                   %d   directory
2049                   %e   filename extension
2050                   %f   filename
2051                   %g   page dimensions and offsets
2052                   %h   height
2053                   %i   input filename
2054                   %k   number of unique colors
2055                   %l   label
2056                   %m   magick
2057                   %n   number of scenes
2058                   %o   output filename
2059                   %p   page number
2060                   %q   image bit depth
2061                   %r   image type description
2062                   %s   scene number
2063                   %t   top of filename
2064                   %u   unique temporary filename
2065                   %w   width
2066                   %x   horizontal resolution
2067                   %y   vertical resolution
2068                   %A   transparency supported
2069                   %C   compression type
2070                   %D   GIF disposal method
2071                   %G   Original width and height
2072                   %H   page height
2073                   %M   original filename specification
2074                   %O   page offset (x,y)
2075                   %P   page dimensions (width,height)
2076                   %Q   compression quality
2077                   %T   time delay (in centi-seconds)
2078                   %U   resolution units
2079                   %W   page width
2080                   %X   page horizontal offset (x)
2081                   %Y   page vertical offset (y)
2082                   %@   trim bounding box
2083                   %#   signature
2084                   \n   newline
2085                   \r   carriage return
2086                   %%   %
2087
2088
2089              For example,
2090
2091                   -format "%m:%f %wx%h"
2092
2093
2094              displays MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an  image  titled  bird.miff
2095              and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2096
2097              If the first character of string is @, the format is read from a
2098              file titled by the remaining characters in the  string.   Please
2099              note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source that it
2100              should be sanitized before use since this may be used to  incor‐
2101              porate any readable file on the system (a security risk).
2102
2103              The values of image type (%r) which may be returned include:
2104
2105                   Bilevel
2106                   Grayscale
2107                   GrayscaleMatte
2108                   Palette
2109                   PaletteMatte
2110                   TrueColor
2111                   TrueColorMatte
2112                   ColorSeparation
2113                   ColorSeparationMatte
2114                   Optimize
2115
2116
2117              You  can  also  use  the  following special formatting syntax to
2118              print Exif information contained in the file:
2119
2120                   %[EXIF:<tag>]
2121
2122
2123              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2124
2125                   *  (print all Exif tags, in keyword=data format)
2126                   !  (print all Exif tags, in tag_number format)
2127                   #hhhh (print data for Exif tag #hhhh)
2128                   ImageWidth
2129                   ImageLength
2130                   BitsPerSample
2131                   Compression
2132                   PhotometricInterpretation
2133                   FillOrder
2134                   DocumentName
2135                   ImageDescription
2136                   Make
2137                   Model
2138                   StripOffsets
2139                   Orientation
2140                   SamplesPerPixel
2141                   RowsPerStrip
2142                   StripByteCounts
2143                   XResolution
2144                   YResolution
2145                   PlanarConfiguration
2146                   ResolutionUnit
2147                   TransferFunction
2148                   Software
2149                   DateTime
2150                   Artist
2151                   WhitePoint
2152                   PrimaryChromaticities
2153                   TransferRange
2154                   JPEGProc
2155                   JPEGInterchangeFormat
2156                   JPEGInterchangeFormatLength
2157                   YCbCrCoefficients
2158                   YCbCrSubSampling
2159                   YCbCrPositioning
2160                   ReferenceBlackWhite
2161                   CFARepeatPatternDim
2162                   CFAPattern
2163                   BatteryLevel
2164                   Copyright
2165                   ExposureTime
2166                   FNumber
2167                   IPTC/NAA
2168                   ExifOffset
2169                   InterColorProfile
2170                   ExposureProgram
2171                   SpectralSensitivity
2172                   GPSInfo
2173                   ISOSpeedRatings
2174                   OECF
2175                   ExifVersion
2176                   DateTimeOriginal
2177                   DateTimeDigitized
2178                   ComponentsConfiguration
2179                   CompressedBitsPerPixel
2180                   ShutterSpeedValue
2181                   ApertureValue
2182                   BrightnessValue
2183                   ExposureBiasValue
2184                   MaxApertureValue
2185                   SubjectDistance
2186                   MeteringMode
2187                   LightSource
2188                   Flash
2189                   FocalLength
2190                   MakerNote
2191                   UserComment
2192                   SubSecTime
2193                   SubSecTimeOriginal
2194                   SubSecTimeDigitized
2195                   FlashPixVersion
2196                   ColorSpace
2197                   ExifImageWidth
2198                   ExifImageLength
2199                   InteroperabilityOffset
2200                   FlashEnergy
2201                   SpatialFrequencyResponse
2202                   FocalPlaneXResolution
2203                   FocalPlaneYResolution
2204                   FocalPlaneResolutionUnit
2205                   SubjectLocation
2206                   ExposureIndex
2207                   SensingMethod
2208                   FileSource
2209                   SceneType
2210
2211
2212              JPEG specific information (from reading  a  JPEG  file)  may  be
2213              obtained like this:
2214
2215                   %[JPEG-<tag>]
2216
2217
2218              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2219
2220                   *                 (all JPEG-related tags, in
2221                                      keyword=data format)
2222                   Quality           IJG JPEG "quality" estimate
2223                   Colorspace        JPEG colorspace numeric ID
2224                   Colorspace-Name   JPEG colorspace name
2225                   Sampling-factors  JPEG sampling factors
2226
2227
2228              Please  note  that  JPEG has no notion of "quality" and that the
2229              quality metric used by, and estimated by the software  is  based
2230              on  the  quality  metric  established  by  IJG  JPEG  6b.  Other
2231              encoders (e.g. that  used  by  Adobe  Photoshop)  use  different
2232              encoding metrics.
2233
2234              Surround  the  format specification with quotation marks to pre‐
2235              vent your shell  from  misinterpreting  any  spaces  and  square
2236              brackets.
2237
2238       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
2239              surround the image with an ornamental border
2240
2241              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.  The
2242              -frame option is not affected by the -gravity option.
2243
2244              The color of the border is specified with the  -mattecolor  com‐
2245              mand line option.
2246
2247       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
2248
2249       -fuzz <distance>{%}
2250              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
2251
2252              A number of algorithms search for a target color. By default the
2253              color must be exact. Use this option to match  colors  that  are
2254              close  (in  Euclidean  distance)  to  the target color in RGB 3D
2255              space. For example, if you want to automatically trim the  edges
2256              of  an image with -trim but the image was scanned and the target
2257              background color may differ by a small amount. This  option  can
2258              account for these differences.
2259
2260              The distance can be in absolute intensity units or, by appending
2261              "%", as a percentage of the  maximum  possible  intensity  (255,
2262              65535, or 4294967295).
2263
2264       -gamma <value>
2265              level of gamma correction
2266
2267              The same color image displayed on two different workstations may
2268              look different due to differences in the  display  monitor.  Use
2269              gamma correction to adjust for this color difference. Reasonable
2270              values extend from 0.8 to 2.3. Gamma less than 1.0  darkens  the
2271              image  and gamma greater than 1.0 lightens it. Large adjustments
2272              to image gamma may result in the loss of some image  information
2273              if the pixel quantum size is only eight bits (quantum range 0 to
2274              255).
2275
2276              You can apply separate gamma values to the red, green, and  blue
2277              channels  of  the  image  with a gamma value list delimited with
2278              slashes (e.g., 1.7/2.3/1.2).
2279
2280              Use +gamma value to set the image gamma level  without  actually
2281              adjusting  the  image pixels. This option is useful if the image
2282              is of a known gamma but not set as an image attribute (e.g.  PNG
2283              images).
2284
2285       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
2286              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
2287
2288              Use the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
2289
2290       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
2291              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
2292
2293              The -geometry option is used for a number of different purposes,
2294              depending on the utility it is used with.
2295
2296              For the X11 commands ('animate', 'display',  and  'import'),  it
2297              specifies  the  preferred size and location of the Image window.
2298              By default, the window size is the image size and  the  location
2299              is chosen by you (or your window manager) when it is mapped.
2300               For  the 'import', 'convert', 'mogrify' utility commands it may
2301              be used to specify the desired size when resizing an image.   In
2302              this  case,  symbols representing resize options may be appended
2303              to the geometry string to influence how the  resize  request  is
2304              treated.
2305
2306              See  later  notes corresponding to usage by particular commands.
2307              The following notes apply to when -geometry is used to express a
2308              resize  request,  taking  into account the current properties of
2309              the image.
2310
2311              By default, the width and height are maximum  values.  That  is,
2312              the  image is expanded or contracted to fit the width and height
2313              value while maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.
2314
2315              Append a ^ to the geometry so that the  image  aspect  ratio  is
2316              maintained when the image is resized, but the resulting width or
2317              height are treated as minimum values rather than maximum values.
2318
2319              Append a ! (exclamation point) to  the  geometry  to  force  the
2320              image  size to exactly the size you specify. For example, if you
2321              specify 640x480! the image width is set to 640 pixels and height
2322              to 480.
2323
2324              If  only  the width is specified, without the trailing 'x', then
2325              height is set to width (e.g.,  -geometry  100  is  the  same  as
2326              -geometry 100x100).  If only the width is specified but with the
2327              trailing 'x', then width assumes the value  and  the  height  is
2328              chosen to maintain the aspect ratio of the image.  Similarly, if
2329              only the height is specified prefixed by  'x'  (e.g.,  -geometry
2330              x256), the width is chosen to maintain the aspect ratio.
2331
2332              To  specify  a percentage width or height instead, append %. The
2333              image size is multiplied by the width and height percentages  to
2334              obtain  the  final  image dimensions. To increase the size of an
2335              image, use a value greater than 100 (e.g. 125%). To decrease  an
2336              image's size, use a percentage less than 100.
2337
2338              Use @ to specify the maximum area in pixels of an image.
2339
2340              Use > to change the dimensions of the image only if its width or
2341              height exceeds the geometry specification. < resizes  the  image
2342              only if both of its dimensions are less than the geometry speci‐
2343              fication. For example, if you specify '640x480>' and  the  image
2344              size is 256x256, the image size does not change. However, if the
2345              image is  512x512  or  1024x1024,  it  is  resized  to  480x480.
2346              Enclose the geometry specification in quotation marks to prevent
2347              the < or > from being interpreted by your shell as a file  redi‐
2348              rection.
2349
2350              When  used  with animate and display, offsets are handled in the
2351              same manner as in X(1) and the -gravity option is not used.   If
2352              the  x  is  negative,  the  offset is measured leftward from the
2353              right edge of the screen to the right edge of  the  image  being
2354              displayed.  Similarly, negative y is measured between the bottom
2355              edges.  The offsets are not affected by  "%";  they  are  always
2356              measured in pixels.
2357
2358              When  used as a composite option, -geometry gives the dimensions
2359              of the image and its location  with  respect  to  the  composite
2360              image.   If the -gravity option is present with NorthEast, East,
2361              or SouthEast gravity, the x represents  the  distance  from  the
2362              right  edge  of  the  image  to  the right edge of the composite
2363              image.  Similarly, if the -gravity option is present with South‐
2364              West,  South,  or  SouthEast  gravity, y is measured between the
2365              bottom edges. Accordingly, a positive offset will never point in
2366              the  direction  outside  of  the  image.   The  offsets  are not
2367              affected by "%"; they are always measured in pixels.  To specify
2368              the dimensions of the composite image, use the -resize option.
2369
2370              When  used  as a convert, import or mogrify option, -geometry is
2371              synonymous with -resize and specifies the  size  of  the  output
2372              image.  The offsets, if present, are ignored.
2373
2374              When  used  as  a  montage option, -geometry specifies the image
2375              size and border size for  each  tile;  default  is  256x256+0+0.
2376              Negative  offsets  (border  dimensions)  are  meaningless.   The
2377              -gravity option affects the placement of the  image  within  the
2378              tile;  the  default  gravity for this purpose is Center.  If the
2379              "%" sign appears in the geometry specification, the tile size is
2380              the specified percentage of the original dimensions of the first
2381              tile.  To specify the dimensions of the montage, use the -resize
2382              option.
2383
2384       -gravity <type>
2385              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
2386
2387              Choices  are:  NorthWest,  North, NorthEast, West, Center, East,
2388              SouthWest, South, SouthEast.
2389
2390              The direction you choose specifies where to  position  the  text
2391              when annotating the image. For example Center gravity forces the
2392              text to be centered within the  image.  By  default,  the  image
2393              gravity  is NorthWest.  See -draw for more details about graphic
2394              primitives.  Only the text primitive is affected by the -gravity
2395              option.
2396
2397              The  -gravity  option is also used in concert with the -geometry
2398              option and other options that take <geometry>  as  a  parameter,
2399              such  as the -crop option.  See -geometry for details of how the
2400              -gravity option interacts with the <x> and <y> parameters  of  a
2401              geometry specification.
2402
2403              When  used  as an option to composite, -gravity gives the direc‐
2404              tion that the image gravitates within the composite.
2405
2406              When used as an option to montage, -gravity gives the  direction
2407              that  an image gravitates within a tile.  The default gravity is
2408              Center for this purpose.
2409
2410       -green-primary <x>,<y>
2411              green chromaticity primary point
2412
2413       -hald-clut <clut>
2414              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
2415
2416              A Hald CLUT ("Color Look-Up Table") is a  special  square  color
2417              image  which  contains a look-up table for red, green, and blue.
2418              The size of the Hald CLUT image is determined by its order.  The
2419              width (and height) of a Hald CLUT is the cube of the order.  For
2420              example, a Hald CLUT of order 8 is 512x512 pixels (262,144  col‐
2421              ors)  and  of order 16 is 4096x4096 (16,777,216 colors).  A spe‐
2422              cial CLUT is the identity CLUT which which causes no  change  to
2423              the  input  image.   In order to use the Hald CLUT, one takes an
2424              identity CLUT and adjusts its colors in some way.  The  modified
2425              CLUT  can  then  be used to transform any number of images in an
2426              identical way.
2427
2428              GraphicsMagick contains a built-in identity CLUT  generator  via
2429              the  IDENTITY  coder.   For  example  reading from the file name
2430              IDENTITY:8 returns an identity CLUT of order  8.   Typical  Hald
2431              CLUT  identity  images  have  an order of between 8 and 16.  The
2432              default order for the IDENTITY CLUT generator is 8.   Interpola‐
2433              tion  is  used so it is not usually necessary for CLUT images to
2434              be very large.  The PNG file format is ideal  for  storing  Hald
2435              CLUT images because it compresses them very well.
2436
2437       -help  print usage instructions
2438
2439       -highlight-color <color>
2440              pixel annotation color
2441
2442              Specifies the color to use when annotating difference pixels.
2443
2444       -highlight-style <style>
2445              pixel annotation style
2446
2447              Specifies  the  pixel  difference  annotation style used to draw
2448              attention to changed pixels. May be one  of  Assign,  Threshold,
2449              Tint, or XOR; where Assign replaces the pixel with the highlight
2450              color (see -highlight-color), Threshold replaces the pixel  with
2451              black  or white based on the difference in intensity, Tint alpha
2452              tints the pixel with the highlight color, and XOR  does  an  XOR
2453              between the pixel and the highlight color.
2454
2455       -iconGeometry <geometry>
2456              specify the icon geometry
2457
2458              Offsets,  if  present in the geometry specification, are handled
2459              in the same manner as the -geometry option, using X11  style  to
2460              handle negative offsets.
2461
2462       -iconic
2463              iconic animation
2464
2465       -immutable
2466              make image immutable
2467
2468       -implode <factor>
2469              implode image pixels about the center
2470
2471       -intent <type>
2472              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
2473
2474              Use  this option to affect the the color management operation of
2475              an image (see -profile).  Choose from these  intents:  Absolute,
2476              Perceptual, Relative, Saturation.
2477
2478              The default intent is undefined.
2479
2480       -interlace <type>
2481              the type of interlacing scheme
2482
2483              Choices  are:  None,  Line,  Plane, or Partition. The default is
2484              None.
2485
2486              This option is used to specify the type  of  interlacing  scheme
2487              for  raw  image  formats  such as RGB or YUV.  None means do not
2488              interlace (RGBRGBRGBRGBRGBRGB...),
2489
2490              Line            uses            scanline             interlacing
2491              (RRR...GGG...BBB...RRR...GGG...BBB...),  and  Plane  uses  plane
2492              interlacing (RRRRRR...GGGGGG...BBBBBB...).
2493
2494              Partition is like plane except the different planes are saved to
2495              individual files (e.g. image.R, image.G, and image.B).
2496
2497              Use Line to create an interlaced PNG or  GIF or progressive JPEG
2498              image.
2499
2500       -label <name>
2501              assign a label to an image
2502
2503              Use this option to assign a specific label to  the  image,  when
2504              writing  to  an image format that supports labels, such as TIFF,
2505              PNG, MIFF, or PostScript. You can include the  the  image  file‐
2506              name, type, width, height, or other image attribute by embedding
2507              special format character.  A label is not drawn  on  the  image,
2508              but  is  embedded  in  the image datastream via a "Label" tag or
2509              similar mechanism.  If you want the label to be visible  on  the
2510              image itself, use the -draw option.  See -comment for details.
2511
2512              For example,
2513
2514                   -label "%m:%f %wx%h"
2515
2516
2517              produces  an  image label of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
2518              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2519
2520              If the first character of string is @, the image label  is  read
2521              from  a  file  titled by the remaining characters in the string.
2522              Please note that if the string comes from  an  untrusted  source
2523              that  it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the con‐
2524              tent of an arbitrary readable file might  be  incorporated  into
2525              the image label (a security risk).
2526
2527              If the -label option appears multiple times, only the last label
2528              is stored.
2529
2530              In PNG images, the label is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk  with
2531              the keyword "label".
2532
2533              When  converting  to  PostScript,  use  this option to specify a
2534              header string to print above the image. Specify the  label  font
2535              with -font.
2536
2537              When creating a montage, by default the label associated with an
2538              image is displayed with the corresponding tile in  the  montage.
2539              Use the +label option to suppress this behavior.
2540
2541
2542
2543       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
2544              perform local adaptive thresholding
2545
2546              Perform  local  adaptive thresholding using the specified width,
2547              height, and offset.  The offset is a distance  in  sample  space
2548              from the mean, as an absolute integer ranging from 0 to the max‐
2549              imum sample value or as a percentage.  If the percent option  is
2550              supplied,  then  the  offset  is computed as a percentage of the
2551              quantum range.  It is strongly recommended to  use  the  percent
2552              option so that results are not sensitive to pixel quantum depth.
2553
2554              For example,
2555
2556                   -colorspace gray -lat "10x10-5%"
2557
2558
2559              will help clarify a scanned grayscale or color document, produc‐
2560              ing a bi-level equivalent.
2561
2562       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
2563              adjust the level of image contrast
2564
2565              Give one, two or three  values  delimited  with  commas:  black-
2566              point,  gamma,  white-point (e.g. 10,1.0,250 or 2%,0.5,98%). The
2567              black and white points range from 0 to MaxRGB or from 0 to 100%;
2568              if  the  white point is omitted it is set to MaxRGB-black_point.
2569              If a "%" sign is present anywhere in the string, the  black  and
2570              white  points  are  percentages  of MaxRGB. Gamma is an exponent
2571              that ranges from 0.1 to 10.; if it is omitted,  the  default  of
2572              1.0 (no gamma correction) is assumed. This interface works simi‐
2573              lar to Photoshop's "Image->Adjustments->Levels..."  "Input  Lev‐
2574              els" interface.
2575
2576       -limit <type> <value>
2577              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
2578              resource limit
2579
2580              By default, resource limits are estimated based on the available
2581              resources  of  the system. The resource limits are Disk, maximum
2582              total disk space consumed; File, maximum number of file descrip‐
2583              tors  allowed  to  be open at once; Map, maximum total number of
2584              file bytes which may be memory  mapped;  Memory,  maximum  total
2585              number  of  bytes of heap memory used for image storage; Pixels,
2586              maximum absolute image size (per image);  Width,  maximum  image
2587              pixels  width; Height, maximum image pixels height; and Threads,
2588              the maximum number of worker threads to use  per  OpenMP  thread
2589              team.
2590
2591              These  resource limits are used to decide if (for a given image)
2592              the decoded image ("pixel cache") should be stored in heap  mem‐
2593              ory  (RAM),  in  a  memory-mapped  disk  file, or in a disk file
2594              accessed via read/write I/O.  The number of total pixels in  one
2595              image,  and/or the width/height, may also be limited in order to
2596              force the reading, or creation of images larger than  the  limit
2597              (in pixels) to intentionally fail. The disk limit establishes an
2598              overall limit since using the disk is the means of last  resort.
2599              When  the  disk  limit  has  been reached, no more images may be
2600              read.
2601
2602              The value argument is an absolute value, but may  have  standard
2603              binary  suffix characters applied ('K', 'M', 'G', 'T', 'P', 'E')
2604              to apply a scaling to the value (based on a multiplier of 1024).
2605              Any additional characters are ignored. For example, '-limit Pix‐
2606              els 10MP' limits the maximum image size  to  10  megapixels  and
2607              '-limit  memory  32MB  -limit map 64MB' limits memory and memory
2608              mapped files to 32 megabytes and 64 megabytes respectively.
2609
2610              Resource limits may also be set using environment variables. The
2611              environment   variables  MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK,  MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES,
2612              MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP, MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY, MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS, MAG‐
2613              ICK_LIMIT_WIDTH,  MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT,and OMP_NUM_THREADS may be
2614              used to set the limits for disk space, open files, memory mapped
2615              size,  heap memory, per-image pixels, image width, image height,
2616              and threads respectively.
2617
2618              Use the option -list resource list the current limits.
2619
2620       -linewidth
2621              the line width for subsequent draw operations
2622
2623       -list <type>
2624              the type of list
2625
2626              Choices are: Color, Delegate, Format, Magic,  Module,  Resource,
2627              or  Type.  The Module option is only available if GraphicsMagick
2628              was built to support loadable modules.
2629
2630              This option lists information about the GraphicsMagick  configu‐
2631              ration.
2632
2633       -log <string>
2634              Specify format for debug log
2635
2636              This  option  specifies  the format for the log printed when the
2637              -debug option is active.
2638
2639              You can display the following components  by  embedding  special
2640              format characters:
2641
2642                   %d   domain
2643                   %e   event
2644                   %f   function
2645                   %l   line
2646                   %m   module
2647                   %p   process ID
2648                   %r   real CPU time
2649                   %t   wall clock time
2650                   %u   user CPU time
2651                   %%   percent sign
2652                   \n   newline
2653                   \r   carriage return
2654
2655
2656              For example:
2657
2658                  gm convert -debug coders -log "%u %m:%l %e" in.gif out.png
2659
2660
2661              The default behavior is to print all of the components.
2662
2663       -loop <iterations>
2664              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
2665
2666              A value other than zero forces the animation to repeat itself up
2667              to iterations times.
2668
2669       -magnify
2670              magnify the image
2671
2672              The image size is doubled using linear interpolation.
2673
2674       -magnify <factor>
2675              magnify the image
2676
2677              The displayed image is magnified by factor.
2678
2679       -map <filename>
2680              choose a particular set of colors from this image
2681
2682              [convert or mogrify]
2683
2684              By default, color reduction chooses an  optimal  set  of  colors
2685              that  best  represent the original image. Alternatively, you can
2686              choose a particular set of colors from an image file  with  this
2687              option.
2688
2689              Use +map to reduce all images in the image sequence that follows
2690              to a single optimal set of colors that best  represent  all  the
2691              images.   The sequence of images is terminated by the appearance
2692              of any option.  If the +map option  appears  after  all  of  the
2693              input images, all images are mapped.
2694
2695       -map <type>
2696              display image using this type.
2697
2698              [animate or display]
2699
2700              Choose from these Standard Colormap types:
2701
2702                   best
2703                   default
2704                   gray
2705                   red
2706                   green
2707                   blue
2708
2709
2710              The X server must support the Standard Colormap you choose, oth‐
2711              erwise an error  occurs.  Use  list  as  the  type  and  display
2712              searches the list of colormap types in top-to-bottom order until
2713              one is located. See xstdcmap(1) for one way of creating Standard
2714              Colormaps.
2715
2716       -mask <filename>
2717              Specify a clipping mask
2718
2719              The  image  read  from  the file is used as a clipping mask.  It
2720              must have the same dimensions as the image being masked.
2721
2722              If the mask image contains an opacity channel,  the  opacity  of
2723              each pixel is used to define the mask.  Otherwise, the intensity
2724              (gray level) of each pixel is used.  Unmasked (black) pixels are
2725              modified  while  masked  pixels  (not  black) are protected from
2726              alteration.
2727
2728              Use +mask to remove the clipping mask.
2729
2730              It is not necessary to use -clip to activate the mask; -clip  is
2731              implied by -mask.
2732
2733       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
2734
2735              If  the  image  does  not have a matte channel, create an opaque
2736              one.
2737
2738              Use +matte to ignore the matte channel (treats it as opaque) and
2739              to avoid writing a matte channel in the output file.
2740
2741              For the compare command, -matte will add an opaque matte channel
2742              to images if they do not already have a matte channel, and matte
2743              will  be  enabled for both images.  Likewise, if +matte is used,
2744              the matte channel is disabled for both images.   This  makes  it
2745              easier  to  compare  images regardless of if they already have a
2746              matte channel.
2747
2748       -mattecolor <color>
2749              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
2750
2751              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
2752              -fill option.
2753
2754       -maximum-error <limit>
2755              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
2756
2757              Specifies the maximum amount of total image error (based on com‐
2758              parison using a specified metric) before an error  ("image  dif‐
2759              ference  exceeds limit") is reported.  The error is reported via
2760              a non-zero command execution return status.
2761
2762       -median <radius>
2763              apply a median filter to the image
2764
2765       -metric <metric>
2766              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
2767
2768       -minify <factor>
2769              minify the image
2770
2771              The image size is halved using linear interpolation.
2772
2773       -mode <value>
2774              mode of operation
2775
2776              The available montage modes are frame to place the images  in  a
2777              rectangular  grid  while  adding  a  decorative frame with drop‐
2778              shadow, unframe to place undecorated  images  in  a  rectangular
2779              grid,  and concatenate to pack the images closely together with‐
2780              out any well-defined grid or decoration.
2781
2782       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
2783              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
2784
2785              Specify the percent change in brightness, color saturation,  and
2786              hue  separated  by  commas. Default argument values are 100 per‐
2787              cent, resulting in no change. For example, to increase the color
2788              brightness  by  20% and decrease the color saturation by 10% and
2789              leave the hue unchanged, use: -modulate 120,90.
2790
2791              Hue is the percentage of  absolute  rotation  from  the  current
2792              position. For example 50 results in a counter-clockwise rotation
2793              of 90 degrees,  150  results  in  a  clockwise  rotation  of  90
2794              degrees,  with  0  and  200  both resulting in a rotation of 180
2795              degrees.
2796
2797       -monitor
2798              show progress indication
2799
2800              A simple command-line progress indication  is  shown  while  the
2801              command  is  running. The process indication shows the operation
2802              currently being performed and the  percent  completed.  Commands
2803              using  X11 may replace the command line progress indication with
2804              a graphical one once an image has been displayed.
2805
2806       -monochrome
2807              transform the image to black and white
2808
2809       -morph <frames>
2810              morphs an image sequence
2811
2812              Both the image pixels and size are linearly interpolated to give
2813              the appearance of a meta-morphosis from one image to the next.
2814
2815              The  sequence  of  images is terminated by the appearance of any
2816              option.  If the -morph option appears after  all  of  the  input
2817              images, all images are morphed.
2818
2819       -mosaic
2820              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
2821
2822              The  -mosaic  option provides a flexible way to composite one or
2823              more images onto a solid-color canvas image. It works similar to
2824              -flatten  except  that a base canvas image is automatically cre‐
2825              ated with a suitable size given the image size, page dimensions,
2826              and  page  offsets of images to be composited.  The color of the
2827              base canvas image may be set via the  -background  option.   The
2828              default  canvas  color  is 'white', but 'black' or 'transparent'
2829              may be more suitable  depending  on  the  composition  algorithm
2830              requested.
2831
2832              The -compose option may be used to specify the composition algo‐
2833              rithm to use when compositing the subsequent image on  the  base
2834              canvas.
2835
2836              The  -page option can be used to establish the dimensions of the
2837              mosaic and to position the subsequent image within  the  mosaic.
2838              If  the  -page  argument does not specify width and height, then
2839              the canvas dimensions are evaluated based on the image sizes and
2840              offsets.
2841
2842              The  sequence  of  images is terminated by the appearance of any
2843              option.  If the -mosaic option appears after all  of  the  input
2844              images, all images are included in the mosaic.
2845
2846              The  following is an example of composing an image based on red,
2847              green, and blue layers extracted from a sequence of  images  and
2848              pasted on the canvas image at specified offsets:
2849
2850                  gm convert -background black \
2851                            -compose CopyRed   -page +0-100 red.png \
2852                            -compose CopyGreen -page +0+40  green.png \
2853                            -compose CopyBlue  -page +0+180 blue.png \
2854                            -mosaic output.png
2855
2856
2857       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
2858              Simulate motion blur
2859
2860              Simulate  motion  blur  by  convolving the image with a Gaussian
2861              operator of the given radius and standard deviation (sigma). For
2862              reasonable  results,  radius  should  be  larger  than sigma. If
2863              radius is zero, then a suitable radius is automatically selected
2864              based on sigma. The angle specifies the angle that the object is
2865              coming from (side which is blurred).
2866
2867       -name  name an image
2868
2869       -negate
2870              replace every pixel with its complementary color
2871
2872              The red, green, and blue intensities of an  image  are  negated.
2873              White  becomes  black, yellow becomes blue, etc.  Use +negate to
2874              only negate the grayscale pixels of the image.
2875
2876       -noise <radius|type>
2877              add or reduce noise in an image
2878
2879              The principal function of noise peak elimination  filter  is  to
2880              smooth  the objects within an image without losing edge informa‐
2881              tion and without creating undesired structures. The central idea
2882              of the algorithm is to replace a pixel with its next neighbor in
2883              value within a pixel window, if this pixel has been found to  be
2884              noise.  A pixel is defined as noise if and only if this pixel is
2885              a maximum or minimum within the pixel window.
2886
2887              Use radius to specify the width of the neighborhood.
2888
2889              Use +noise followed by a noise type to add noise  to  an  image.
2890              The noise added modulates the existing image pixels. Choose from
2891              these noise types:
2892
2893                   Uniform
2894                   Gaussian
2895                   Multiplicative
2896                   Impulse
2897                   Laplacian
2898                   Poisson
2899                   Random (uniform distribution)
2900
2901
2902       -noop  NOOP (no option)
2903
2904              The -noop option can be used to terminate a group of images  and
2905              reset  all options to their default values, when no other option
2906              is desired.
2907
2908       -normalize
2909              transform image to span the full range of color values
2910
2911              This is a contrast enhancement technique based on the image his‐
2912              togram.
2913
2914              When  computing  the  contrast enhancement values, the histogram
2915              edges are truncated so that the majority of the image pixels are
2916              considered in the constrast enhancement, and outliers (e.g. ran‐
2917              dom noise or minute details) are ignored.  The default  is  that
2918              0.1  percent of the histogram entries are ignored.  The percent‐
2919              age of the histogram to ignore may be  specified  by  using  the
2920              -set  option  with  the histogram-threshold parameter similar to
2921              -set histogram-threshold 0.01 to specify 0.01  percent.   Use  0
2922              percent  to  use  the entire histogram, with possibly diminished
2923              contrast enhancement.
2924
2925       -opaque <color>
2926              change this color to the pen color within the image
2927
2928              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
2929              -fill  option.   The color is replaced if it is identical to the
2930              target color, or close enough to the target color in a 3D  space
2931              as defined by the Euclidean distance specified by -fuzz.
2932
2933              See -fill and -fuzz for more details.
2934
2935       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
2936              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
2937              channel
2938
2939              Apply a low-level mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to  a
2940              selected  image  channel or all image channels. Operations which
2941              result in negative results are reset  to  zero,  and  operations
2942              which overflow the available range are reset to the maximum pos‐
2943              sible value.
2944
2945              Select a channel from: Red, Green, Blue, Opacity,  Matte,  Cyan,
2946              Magenta,  Yellow,  Black,  All,  or  Gray. All only modifies the
2947              color channels and does not modify the Opacity  channel.  Except
2948              for  the threshold operators, All operates on each channel inde‐
2949              pendently so that operations are on a per-channel basis.
2950
2951              Gray treats the color channels as a grayscale intensity and per‐
2952              forms  the requested operation on the equivalent pixel intensity
2953              so the result is a gray image.  Select  an  operator  from  Add,
2954              And,  Assign,  Depth,  Divide,  Gamma, Negate, LShift, Log, Max,
2955              Min, Multiply, Or, Pow, RShift, Subtract, Threshold,  Threshold-
2956              White, Threshold-White-Negate, Threshold-Black, Threshold-Black-
2957              Negate,  Xor,  Noise-Gaussian,  Noise-Impulse,  Noise-Laplacian,
2958              Noise-Multiplicative,  Noise-Poisson,  Noise-Random,  and Noise-
2959              Uniform.
2960
2961              Rvalue may be any floating  point  or  integer  value.  Normally
2962              rvalue  will be in the range of 0 to MaxRGB, where MaxRGB is the
2963              largest quantum value  supported  by  the  GraphicsMagick  build
2964              (255,  65535,  or  4294967295) but values outside this range are
2965              useful for some arithmetic operations.  Arguments to logical  or
2966              bit-wise  operations  are  rounded  to a positive integral value
2967              prior to use. If a percent (%) symbol is appended to  the  argu‐
2968              ment, then the argument has a range of 0 to 100 percent.
2969
2970              The following is a description of the operators:
2971
2972
2973               Add
2974
2975                    Result is rvalue added to channel value.
2976
2977               And
2978
2979                    Result is the logical AND of rvalue with channel value.
2980
2981               Assign
2982
2983                    Result is rvalue.
2984
2985               Depth
2986
2987                    Result  is  channel  value  adjusted  so  that  it  may be
2988                    (approximately) stored in the  specified  number  of  bits
2989                    without additional loss.
2990
2991               Divide
2992
2993                    Result is channel value divided by rvalue.
2994
2995               Gamma
2996
2997                    Result is channel value gamma adjusted by rvalue.
2998
2999               LShift
3000
3001                    Result  is  channel  value  bitwise left shifted by rvalue
3002                    bits.
3003
3004               Log
3005
3006                    Result is computed as log(value*rvalue+1)/log(rvalue+1).
3007
3008               Max
3009
3010                    Result is assigned to rvalue if  rvalue  is  greater  than
3011                    value.
3012
3013               Min
3014
3015                    Result is assigned to rvalue if rvalue is less than value.
3016
3017               Multiply
3018
3019                    Result is channel value multiplied by rvalue.
3020
3021               Negate
3022
3023                    Result is inverse of channel value (like a film negative).
3024                    An rvalue must be supplied  but  is  currently  not  used.
3025                    Inverting the image twice results in the original image.
3026
3027               Or
3028
3029                    Result is the logical OR of rvalue with channel value.
3030
3031               Pow
3032
3033                    Result  is computed as pow(value,rvalue). Similar to Gamma
3034                    except that rvalue is not inverted.
3035
3036               RShift
3037
3038                    Result is channel value bitwise right  shifted  by  rvalue
3039                    bits.
3040
3041               Subtract
3042
3043                    Result is channel value minus rvalue.
3044
3045               Threshold
3046
3047                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3048                    rvalue, or minimum (black) if it is less than or equal  to
3049                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3050                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3051
3052               Threshold-white
3053
3054                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3055                    rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is less than or equal to
3056                    rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise from the
3057                    bright  parts  of an image. If all channels are specified,
3058                    then thresholding is done based on computed  pixel  inten‐
3059                    sity.
3060
3061               Threshold-White-Negate
3062
3063                    Result  is  set  to black if channel value is greater than
3064                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is less  than  or  equal  to
3065                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3066                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3067
3068               Threshold-black
3069
3070                    Result is minimum (black) if channel value  is  less  than
3071                    than  rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is greater than or
3072                    equal to rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise
3073                    from the dark parts of an image. If all channels are spec‐
3074                    ified, then thresholding is done based on  computed  pixel
3075                    intensity.
3076
3077               Threshold-Black-Negate
3078
3079                    Result  is set to white if channel value is less than than
3080                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is greater than or equal  to
3081                    rvalue.  If  all channels are specified, then thresholding
3082                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3083
3084               Xor
3085
3086                    Result is the logical XOR of rvalue with channel value. An
3087                    interesting  property  of  XOR is that performing the same
3088                    operation twice results in the original value.
3089
3090               Noise-Gaussian
3091
3092                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  gauss‐
3093                    ian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3094
3095               Noise-Impulse
3096
3097                    Result is the current channel value modulated with impulse
3098                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3099
3100               Noise-Laplacian
3101
3102                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  lapla‐
3103                    cian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3104
3105               Noise-Multiplicative
3106
3107                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with multi‐
3108                    plicative gaussian noise according to the intensity speci‐
3109                    fied by rvalue.
3110
3111               Noise-Poisson
3112
3113                    Result is the current channel value modulated with poisson
3114                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3115
3116               Noise-Random
3117
3118                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  random
3119                    (uniform  distribution)  noise  according to the intensity
3120                    specified  by  rvalue.   The   initial   noise   intensity
3121                    (rvalue=1.0) is the range of one pixel quantum span.
3122
3123               Noise-Uniform
3124
3125                    Result  is  the  channel  value with uniform noise applied
3126                    according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131               As an example, the Assign operator assigns a fixed value  to  a
3132               channel.  For example, this command sets the red channel to the
3133               mid-range value:
3134
3135                   gm convert in.bmp -operator red assign "50%" out.bmp
3136
3137
3138               The following applies 50% thresholding to the image and returns
3139               a gray image:
3140
3141                   gm convert in.bmp -operator gray threshold "50%" out.bmp
3142
3143
3144       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
3145              ordered dither the image
3146
3147              The  channel  or  channels specified in the channeltype argument
3148              are reduced to binary,  using  an  ordered  dither  method.  The
3149              choices  for  channeltype  are All, Intensity, Red, Green, Blue,
3150              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3151
3152              When channeltype is "All", the color samples are dithered into a
3153              gray level and then that gray level is stored in the three color
3154              channels.  Separately, the opacity channel is  dithered  into  a
3155              bilevel opacity value which is stored in the opacity channel.
3156
3157              When  channeltype  is  "Intensity",  only  the color samples are
3158              dithered. When channeltype is "opacity"  or  "matte",  only  the
3159              opacity  channel is dithered. When a color channel is specified,
3160              only that channel is dithered.
3161
3162              The choices for N are 2 through 7. The image is divided into NxN
3163              pixel  tiles.   In  each  tile, some or all pixels are turned to
3164              white depending on their intensity.  For each N, (N**2)+1 levels
3165              of gray can be represented.  For N == 2, 3, or 4, the pixels are
3166              turned to white in an order  that  maximizes  dispersion  (i.e.,
3167              reduces  granularity),  while  for  N  ==  5, 6, and 7, they are
3168              turned to white in an order  that  creates  a  roughly  circular
3169              black  blob  in  the  middle of each tile.  An attractive "half-
3170              tone" looking image can be obtained by first rotating the  image
3171              45  degrees,  performing  a  5x5  ordered-dither operation, then
3172              rotating it back to the original orientation and cropping to the
3173              original  image  dimensions.   If  the  original image is gamma-
3174              encoded, it is adviseable to  convert  it  to  linear  intensity
3175              first, e.g., with the "-gamma 0.45455" option.
3176
3177       -output-directory <directory>
3178              output files to directory
3179
3180              Use  -output-directory  to  specify  a  directory under which to
3181              write the output files. Normally mogrify  overwrites  the  input
3182              files, but with this option the output files may be written to a
3183              different directory tree so that the input files are  preserved.
3184              The algorithm used preserves all of the input path specification
3185              in the  output  path  so  that  the  user-specified  input  path
3186              (including  any  sub-directory  part)  is appended to the output
3187              path. If the input file lacks  an  extension,  then  a  suitable
3188              extension  is  automatically added to the output file.  The user
3189              is responsible for creating the output directory specified as an
3190              argument,  but  subdirectories  will be created as needed if the
3191              -create-directories option is supplied.  This option may be used
3192              to  apply  transformations on files from one directory and write
3193              the transformed files to a different directory.  In  conjunction
3194              with  -create-directories,  this  option  is designed to support
3195              transforming whole directory trees of files  provided  that  the
3196              relative  path of the input file is included as part the list of
3197              filenames.
3198
3199       -orient <orientation>
3200              Set the image orientation attribute
3201
3202              Sets the image orientation  attribute.   The  image  orientation
3203              attribute  is  compatible with the TIFF orientation tag (and the
3204              EXIF orientation tag).  Accepted values are undefined,  TopLeft,
3205              TopRight,  BottomRight, BottomLeft, LeftTop, RightTop, RightBot‐
3206              tom, LeftBottom, and hyphenated versions thereof (e.g. left-bot‐
3207              tom).   Please note that GraphicsMagick does not include an EXIF
3208              editor so if an EXIF profile is written to the output image, the
3209              value in the EXIF profile might not match the image.  It is pos‐
3210              sible for an image file to indicate its orientation  in  several
3211              different ways simultaneously.
3212
3213       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
3214              size and location of an image canvas
3215
3216              Use this option to specify the dimensions of the PostScript page
3217              in dots per inch or a TEXT page in pixels.  The  choices  for  a
3218              PostScript page are:
3219
3220                   11x17         792  1224
3221                   Ledger       1224   792
3222                   Legal         612  1008
3223                   Letter        612   792
3224                   LetterSmall   612   792
3225                   ArchE        2592  3456
3226                   ArchD        1728  2592
3227                   ArchC        1296  1728
3228                   ArchB         864  1296
3229                   ArchA         648   864
3230                   A0           2380  3368
3231                   A1           1684  2380
3232                   A2           1190  1684
3233                   A3            842  1190
3234                   A4            595   842
3235                   A4Small       595   842
3236                   A5            421   595
3237                   A6            297   421
3238                   A7            210   297
3239                   A8            148   210
3240                   A9            105   148
3241                   A10            74   105
3242                   B0           2836  4008
3243                   B1           2004  2836
3244                   B2           1418  2004
3245                   B3           1002  1418
3246                   B4            709  1002
3247                   B5            501   709
3248                   C0           2600  3677
3249                   C1           1837  2600
3250                   C2           1298  1837
3251                   C3            918  1298
3252                   C4            649   918
3253                   C5            459   649
3254                   C6            323   459
3255                   Flsa          612   936
3256                   Flse          612   936
3257                   HalfLetter    396   612
3258
3259
3260              For convenience you can specify the page size by media (e.g. A4,
3261              Ledger, etc.). Otherwise,  -page  behaves  much  like  -geometry
3262              (e.g.  -page letter+43+43>).
3263
3264              This  option  is  also used to place subimages when writing to a
3265              multi-image format that supports offsets, such as GIF89 and MNG.
3266              When used for this purpose the offsets are always  measured from
3267              the top left corner of the canvas and are not  affected  by  the
3268              -gravity   option.    To  position  a  GIF  or  MNG  image,  use
3269              -page{+-}<x>{+-}<y> (e.g. -page +100+200).  When  writing  to  a
3270              MNG  file,  a -page option appearing ahead of the first image in
3271              the sequence with nonzero width and height defines the width and
3272              height  values  that  are written in the MHDR chunk.  Otherwise,
3273              the MNG width and height are computed from the bounding box that
3274              contains all images in the sequence.  When writing a GIF89 file,
3275              only the bounding box method is used  to  determine  its  dimen‐
3276              sions.
3277
3278              For  a  PostScript  page, the image is sized as in -geometry and
3279              positioned relative to the lower left hand corner of the page by
3280              {+-}<xoffset>{+-}<y offset>. Use -page 612x792>, for example, to
3281              center the image within the page. If the image size exceeds  the
3282              PostScript  page,  it  is  reduced to fit the page.  The default
3283              gravity for the -page option is NorthWest, i.e., positive x  and
3284              y  offset  are measured rightward and downward from the top left
3285              corner of the page, unless the -gravity option is present with a
3286              value other than NorthWest.
3287
3288              The default page dimensions for a TEXT image is 612x792.
3289
3290              This option is used in concert with -density.
3291
3292              Use +page to remove the page settings for an image.
3293
3294       -paint <radius>
3295              simulate an oil painting
3296
3297              Each  pixel is replaced by the most frequent color in a circular
3298              neighborhood whose width is specified with radius.
3299
3300       -pause <seconds>
3301              pause between animation loops [animate]
3302
3303              Pause for the specified number of seconds before  repeating  the
3304              animation.
3305
3306       -pause <seconds>
3307              pause between snapshots [import]
3308
3309              Pause for the specified number of seconds before taking the next
3310              snapshot.
3311
3312       -pen <color>
3313              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
3314
3315       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
3316
3317              Use this option to disable reading  the  image  pixels  so  that
3318              image  characteristics  such  as  the  image  dimensions  may be
3319              obtained very quickly. For identify, use +ping to force  reading
3320              the  image pixels so that the pixel read rate may be included in
3321              the displayed information.
3322
3323       -pointsize <value>
3324              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
3325
3326       -preview <type>
3327              image preview type
3328
3329              Use this option to affect the  preview  operation  of  an  image
3330              (e.g.    convert  file.png  -preview  Gamma  Preview:gamma.png).
3331              Choose from these previews:
3332
3333                   Rotate
3334                   Shear
3335                   Roll
3336                   Hue
3337                   Saturation
3338                   Brightness
3339                   Gamma
3340                   Spiff
3341                   Dull
3342                   Grayscale
3343                   Quantize
3344                   Despeckle
3345                   ReduceNoise
3346                   AddNoise
3347                   Sharpen
3348                   Blur
3349                   Threshold
3350                   EdgeDetect
3351                   Spread
3352                   Shade
3353                   Raise
3354                   Segment
3355                   Solarize
3356                   Swirl
3357                   Implode
3358                   Wave
3359                   OilPaint
3360                   CharcoalDrawing
3361                   JPEG
3362
3363
3364              The default preview is JPEG.
3365
3366       -process <command>
3367              process a sequence of images using a process module
3368
3369              The command argument has the form module=arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN
3370              where  module  is  the  name of the module to invoke (e.g. "ana‐
3371              lyze") and arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN are an  arbitrary  number  of
3372              arguments to pass to the process module.  The sequence of images
3373              is terminated by the appearance of any option.
3374
3375              If the -process option appears after all of  the  input  images,
3376              all images are processed.
3377
3378       -profile <filename>
3379              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
3380
3381              -profile  filename  adds  an  ICM  (ICC  color management), IPTC
3382              (newswire information), or a generic (including Exif) profile to
3383              the image
3384
3385              Use  +profile  icm,  +profile  iptc, or +profile profile_name to
3386              remove the respective profile.  Multiple profiles may be listed,
3387              separated  by  commas.  Profiles may be excluded from subsequent
3388              listed matches by  preceding  their  name  with  an  exclamation
3389              point.   For  example,  +profile  '!icm,*'  strips  all profiles
3390              except for the ICM profile.  Use identify -verbose to  find  out
3391              what profiles are in the image file.  Use +profile "*" to remove
3392              all profiles.  Writing the image to a format that does not  sup‐
3393              port  profiles  will  of  course  also  cause all profiles to be
3394              removed.  The JPEG and PNG formats will store any profiles  that
3395              have been read and not removed.  In JPEG they are stored in APP1
3396              markers, and in PNG they are stored as hex-coded binary in  com‐
3397              pressed zTXt chunks, except for the iCC chunk which is stored in
3398              the iCCP chunk.
3399
3400              To extract a profile, the -profile option is not used.  Instead,
3401              simply  write  the  file  to an image format such as APP1, 8BIM,
3402              ICM, or IPTC.
3403
3404              For example, to extract the Exif data (which is stored  in  JPEG
3405              files in the APP1 profile), use
3406
3407
3408                  gm convert cockatoo.jpg exifdata.app1
3409
3410              Note  that GraphicsMagick does not attempt to update any profile
3411              to reflect changes made to the image, e.g., rotation  from  por‐
3412              trait  to landscape orientation, so it is possible that the pre‐
3413              served profile may contain invalid data.
3414
3415       -preserve-timestamp
3416              preserve the original timestamps of the file
3417
3418              Use this option to preserve the original modification and access
3419              timestamps of the file, even if it has been modified.
3420
3421       +progress
3422              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
3423
3424              By  default,  when an image is displayed, a progress monitor bar
3425              is shown in the top left corner of  an  existing  image  display
3426              window,  and  the  current  cursor is replaced with an hourglass
3427              cursor. Use +progress to disable the progress monitor  and  busy
3428              cursor during display operations.  While the progress monitor is
3429              disabled for all operations, the busy  cursor  continues  to  be
3430              enabled  for  non-display  operations  such as image processing.
3431              This option is useful for non-interactive display operations, or
3432              when a "clean" look is desired.
3433
3434       -quality <value>
3435              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
3436               For the JPEG and MPEG image formats, quality is 0 (lowest image
3437              quality and highest compression) to 100 (best quality but  least
3438              effective  compression).  The  default  quality  is 75.  Use the
3439              -sampling-factor option to specify the factors for chroma  down‐
3440              sampling.   To  use  the same quality value as that found by the
3441              JPEG decoder, use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3442
3443              For the MIFF image format, and the TIFF format while  using  ZIP
3444              compression,  quality/10 is the zlib compression level, which is
3445              0 (worst but fastest compression) to 9 (best  but  slowest).  It
3446              has  no effect on the image appearance, since the compression is
3447              always lossless.
3448
3449              For the JPEG-2000 image format, quality is mapped using  a  non-
3450              linear  equation to the compression ratio required by the Jasper
3451              library. This non-linear equation is intended to loosely approx‐
3452              imate  the  quality  provided by the JPEG v1 format. The default
3453              quality value 75 results in a request for 16:1 compression.  The
3454              quality  value  100  results in a request for non-lossy compres‐
3455              sion.
3456
3457              For the MNG and PNG image formats, the quality  value  sets  the
3458              zlib compression level (quality / 10) and filter-type (quality %
3459              10). Compression levels range from 0  (fastest  compression)  to
3460              100  (best  but  slowest). For compression level 0, the Huffman-
3461              only strategy is used, which is fastest but not necessarily  the
3462              worst compression.
3463
3464              If  filter-type  is 4 or less, the specified filter-type is used
3465              for all scanlines:
3466
3467                   0: none
3468                   1: sub
3469                   2: up
3470                   3: average
3471                   4: Paeth
3472
3473
3474              If filter-type is 5, adaptive filtering is used when quality  is
3475              greater  than 50 and the image does not have a color map, other‐
3476              wise no filtering is used.
3477
3478              If filter-type is 6,  adaptive  filtering  with  minimum-sum-of-
3479              absolute-values is used.
3480
3481              Only  if  the output is MNG, if filter-type is 7, the LOCO color
3482              transformation and adaptive filtering with  minimum-sum-of-abso‐
3483              lute-values are used.
3484
3485              The  default  is quality is 75, which means nearly the best com‐
3486              pression with adaptive filtering.  The quality  setting  has  no
3487              effect  on  the appearance of PNG and MNG images, since the com‐
3488              pression is always lossless.
3489
3490              For further information, see the PNG specification.
3491
3492              When writing a JNG image with transparency, two  quality  values
3493              are  required,  one for the main image and one for the grayscale
3494              image that conveys the opacity channel.  These are written as  a
3495              single  integer  equal to the main image quality plus 1000 times
3496              the opacity quality.  For example, if you want to use quality 75
3497              for  the main image and quality 90 to compress the opacity data,
3498              use -quality 90075.
3499
3500              For the PNM family of formats (PNM,  PGM,  and  PPM)  specify  a
3501              quality  factor  of zero in order to obtain the ASCII variant of
3502              the format. Note that -compress none used to be used to  trigger
3503              ASCII  output  but  provided  the  opposite  result  of what was
3504              expected as compared with other formats.
3505
3506              For the TIFF format, the JPEG, WebP, Zip, and  Zstd  compression
3507              algorithms  are  influenced by the quality value.  JPEG and WebP
3508              provide lossy compression so higher quality  produces  a  larger
3509              file  with less degradation.  The Zip and Zstd compression algo‐
3510              rithms (and WebP in lossless mode) are lossless  and  for  these
3511              algorithms  a higher ´quality' means to work harder to produce a
3512              smaller file, but with no difference in image quality.
3513
3514       -raise <width>x<height>
3515              lighten or darken image edges
3516
3517              This will create a 3-D effect. See -geometry for details details
3518              about the geometry specification. Offsets are not used.
3519
3520              Use -raise to create a raised effect, otherwise use +raise.
3521
3522       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
3523              random threshold the image
3524
3525              The  channel or channels specified in the <channeltype> argument
3526              are reduced to binary, using  an  random-threshold  method.  The
3527              choices  for  channeltype  are All, Intensity, Red, Green, Blue,
3528              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3529
3530              When channeltype is "All", the  color  samples  are  thresholded
3531              into a graylevel and then that gray level is stored in the three
3532              color channels. Separately, the opacity channel  is  thresholded
3533              into  a  bilevel  opacity  value  which is stored in the opacity
3534              channel. For each pixel, a new random number is used  to  estab‐
3535              lish  the  threshold to be used. The threshold never exceeds the
3536              specified maximum (HIGH) and is never less  than  the  specified
3537              minimum (LOW).
3538
3539              When  channeltype  is  "intensity",  only  the color samples are
3540              thresholded. When channeltype is "opacity" or "matte", only  the
3541              opacity  channel  is  thresholded. The other named channels only
3542              threshold the associated channel.
3543
3544       -recolor <matrix>
3545              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
3546
3547              A user supplied color translation matrix (expressed  as  a  text
3548              string)  is  used to translate/blend the image channels based on
3549              weightings in a supplied matrix which may be of order  3  (color
3550              channels  only),  4  (color  channels plus opacity), or 5 (color
3551              channels plus opacity and offset).  Values in the columns of the
3552              matrix  (red, green, blue, opacity) are used as multipliers with
3553              the existing channel values and added together according to  the
3554              rows of the matrix.  Matrix values are floating point and may be
3555              negative.  The offset column (column 5) is purely  additive  and
3556              is  scaled  such  that 0.0 to 1.0 represents the maximum quantum
3557              range (but values are not limited to this range). The  math  for
3558              the  color  translation  matrix is similar to that used by Adobe
3559              Flash except that the offset is scaled to 1.0 (divide Flash off‐
3560              set  by 255 for use with GraphicsMagick) so that the results are
3561              independent of quantum depth.
3562
3563              An identity matrix exists for each matrix order which results in
3564              no  change to the image.  The translation matrix should be based
3565              on an alteration of the identity matrix.
3566
3567              Identity matrix of order 3
3568
3569                1 0 0
3570                0 1 0
3571                0 0 1
3572
3573
3574              which may be formatted into a convenient matrix argument similar
3575              to (comma is treated as white space):
3576
3577                -recolor "1 0 0, 0 1 0, 0 0 1"
3578
3579
3580              Identity matrix of order 4
3581
3582                1 0 0 0
3583                0 1 0 0
3584                0 0 1 0
3585                0 0 0 1
3586
3587
3588              Identity  matrix  of order 5.  The last row is required to exist
3589              for the purpose of parsing, but is otherwise not used.
3590
3591                1 0 0 0 0
3592                0 1 0 0 0
3593                0 0 1 0 0
3594                0 0 0 1 0
3595                0 0 0 0 1
3596
3597
3598              As an example, an image wrongly in BGR channel order may be con‐
3599              verted to RGB using this matrix (blue->red, red->blue):
3600
3601                0 0 1
3602                0 1 0
3603                1 0 0
3604
3605
3606              and  an  RGB  image using standard Rec.709 primaries may be con‐
3607              verted to grayscale using this matrix of standard weighting fac‐
3608              tors:
3609
3610                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3611                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3612                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3613
3614
3615              and  contrast may be reduced by scaling down by 80% and adding a
3616              10% offset:
3617
3618                0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1
3619                0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.1
3620                0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.1
3621                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.1
3622                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
3623
3624
3625       -red-primary <x>,<y>
3626              red chromaticity primary point
3627
3628       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3629              apply options to a portion of the image
3630
3631              The x and y offsets are treated in the same manner as in -crop.
3632
3633       -remote
3634              perform a X11 remote operation
3635
3636              The -remote command sends a command to a  "gm  display"  or  "gm
3637              animate"  which  is already running. The only command recognized
3638              at this time is the name of an image file to load. This capabil‐
3639              ity is very useful to load new images without needing to restart
3640              GraphicsMagick (e.g. for a slide-show or to  use  GraphicsMagick
3641              as  the  display  engine  for  a  different  GUI).  Also see the
3642              +progress option for a way to disable progress indication for  a
3643              clean look while loading new images.
3644
3645       -render
3646              render vector operations
3647
3648              Use  +render  to  turn  off rendering vector operations. This is
3649              useful when saving the result to vector formats such as  MVG  or
3650              SVG.
3651
3652       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
3653              Adjust image page offsets
3654
3655              Adjust  the  current  image  page canvas and position based on a
3656              relative page specification.  This option may be used to  change
3657              the  location of a subframe (e.g. part of an animation) prior to
3658              composition.   If  the  geometry   specification   is   absolute
3659              (includes  a  '!'),  then  the offset adjustment is absolute and
3660              there is no adjustment to page width and height,  otherwise  the
3661              page width and height values are also adjusted based on the cur‐
3662              rent image dimensions.  Use +repage to set the image  page  off‐
3663              sets to default.
3664
3665       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
3666              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
3667
3668              Resize  the  image so that its rendered size remains the same as
3669              the original at the specified target resolution. Either the cur‐
3670              rent  image  resolution  units or the previously set with -units
3671              are used to interpret the argument. For example, if  a  300  DPI
3672              image  renders at 3 inches by 2 inches on a 300 DPI device, when
3673              the image has been resampled to 72 DPI,  it  will  render  at  3
3674              inches  by  2 inches on a 72 DPI device.  Note that only a small
3675              number of image formats (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and TIFF)  are  capable
3676              of  storing  the image resolution. For formats which do not sup‐
3677              port an image resolution, the original resolution of  the  image
3678              must  be  specified  via  -density  on the command line prior to
3679              specifying the resample resolution.
3680
3681              Note that Photoshop stores and obtains image resolution  from  a
3682              proprietary  embedded  profile.  If  this  profile exists in the
3683              image, then Photoshop will continue to treat the image using its
3684              former  resolution,  ignoring  the image resolution specified in
3685              the standard file header.
3686
3687              Some image formats (e.g. PNG) require use of metric  or  english
3688              units  so even if the original image used a particular unit sys‐
3689              tem, if it is saved to a different format prior  to  resampling,
3690              then it may be necessary to specify the desired resolution units
3691              using -units since the original units may  have  been  lost.  In
3692              other  words,  do  not  assume  that  the  resolution  units are
3693              restored if the image has been saved to a file.
3694
3695       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3696              resize an image
3697
3698              This is an alias for the -geometry option and it behaves in  the
3699              same  manner. If the -filter option precedes the -resize option,
3700              the specified filter is used.
3701
3702              There are some exceptions:
3703
3704              When used as a composite option, -resize conveys  the  preferred
3705              size  of  the output image, while -geometry conveys the size and
3706              placement of the composite image within the main image.
3707
3708              When used as a montage option,  -resize  conveys  the  preferred
3709              size  of  the montage, while -geometry conveys information about
3710              the tiles.
3711
3712       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3713              roll an image vertically or horizontally
3714
3715              See -geometry for details the geometry specification.  The x and
3716              y offsets are not affected by the -gravity option.
3717
3718              A  negative x offset rolls the image left-to-right. A negative y
3719              offset rolls the image top-to-bottom.
3720
3721       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
3722              rotate the image
3723
3724              Positive angles rotate the image in a clockwise direction  while
3725              negative angles rotate counter-clockwise.
3726
3727              Use  > to rotate the image only if its width exceeds the height.
3728              < rotates the image only if its width is less than  the  height.
3729              For example, if you specify -rotate "-90>" and the image size is
3730              480x640, the image is not rotated.  However,  if  the  image  is
3731              640x480,  it  is  rotated  by  -90  degrees.  If you use > or <,
3732              enclose it in quotation marks to prevent it from being misinter‐
3733              preted as a file redirection.
3734
3735              Empty  triangles  left  over  from rotating the image are filled
3736              with the color defined as  background  (class  backgroundColor).
3737              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3738              -fill option.
3739
3740       -sample <geometry>
3741              scale image using pixel sampling
3742
3743              See -geometry for  details  about  the  geometry  specification.
3744              -sample  ignores  the -filter selection if the -filter option is
3745              present.  Offsets,  if  present  in  the  geometry  string,  are
3746              ignored, and the -gravity option has no effect.
3747
3748       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
3749              chroma subsampling factors
3750
3751              This  option  specifies  the  sampling factors to be used by the
3752              DPX, JPEG, MPEG, or YUV encoders for  chroma  downsampling.  The
3753              sampling factor must be specified while reading the raw YUV for‐
3754              mat since it is not preserved in  the  file  header.   Industry-
3755              standard  video subsampling notation such as "4:2:2" may also be
3756              used to specify the sampling factors. "4:2:2" is equivalent to a
3757              specification of "2x1"
3758
3759              The  JPEG  decoder  obtains  the  original sampling factors (and
3760              quality settings) when a JPEG file is read. To re-use the origi‐
3761              nal  sampling factors (and quality setting) when JPEG is output,
3762              use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3763
3764       -scale <geometry>
3765              scale the image.
3766
3767              See -geometry for  details  about  the  geometry  specification.
3768              -scale  uses  a  simpler,  faster  algorithm, and it ignores the
3769              -filter selection if the -filter option is present.  Offsets, if
3770              present  in  the  geometry string, are ignored, and the -gravity
3771              option has no effect.
3772
3773       -scene <value>
3774              set scene number
3775
3776              This option sets the scene number of an image or the first image
3777              in an image sequence.
3778
3779       -scenes <value-value>
3780              range of image scene numbers to read
3781
3782              Each  image in the range is read with the filename followed by a
3783              period (.) and the decimal scene number.  You  can  change  this
3784              behavior  by  embedding a %d, %0Nd, %o, %0No, %x, or %0Nx printf
3785              format specification in the file name. For example,
3786
3787                  gm montage -scenes 5-7 image.miff montage.miff
3788
3789
3790              makes  a  montage  of  files  image.miff.5,  image.miff.6,   and
3791              image.miff.7, and
3792
3793                  gm animate -scenes 0-12 image%02d.miff
3794
3795
3796              animates files image00.miff, image01.miff, through image12.miff.
3797
3798       -screen
3799              specify the screen to capture
3800
3801              This  option  indicates that the GetImage request used to obtain
3802              the image should  be  done  on  the  root  window,  rather  than
3803              directly  on  the specified window.  In this way, you can obtain
3804              pieces of other windows that overlap the specified  window,  and
3805              more importantly, you can capture menus or other popups that are
3806              independent windows but appear over the specified window.
3807
3808       -set <attribute> <value>
3809              set an image attribute
3810
3811              Set a named image attribute.  The attribute is set on  the  cur‐
3812              rent (previously specified on command line) image.
3813
3814       +set <attribute>
3815              unset an image attribute
3816
3817              Unset  a  named  image attribute.  The attribute is removed from
3818              the current (previously specified on command line) image.
3819
3820       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
3821              segment an image
3822
3823              Segment an image by analyzing the histograms of the color compo‐
3824              nents  and identifying units that are homogeneous with the fuzzy
3825              c-means technique.
3826
3827              Segmentation is a very useful fast  and  and  approximate  color
3828              quantization algorithm for scanned printed pages or scanned car‐
3829              toons. It may also be used as a special effect. Specify  cluster
3830              threshold as the minimum percentage of total pixels in a cluster
3831              before it is considered valid.  For huge images containing small
3832              detail,  this  may need to be a tiny fraction of a percent (e.g.
3833              0.015) so that important detail is not lost.  Smoothing  thresh‐
3834              old  eliminates noise in the second derivative of the histogram.
3835              As the value is increased, you can expect a smoother second  de‐
3836              rivative.  The  default is 1.5. Add the -verbose option to see a
3837              dump of cluster statistics given the parameters used.  The  sta‐
3838              tistics may be used as a guide to help fine tune the options.
3839
3840       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
3841              shade the image using a distant light source
3842
3843              Specify  azimuth  and  elevation  as  the  position of the light
3844              source. Use +shade to return the shading results as a  grayscale
3845              image.
3846
3847       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
3848              shadow the montage
3849
3850       -shared-memory
3851              use shared memory
3852
3853              This  option specifies whether the utility should attempt to use
3854              shared memory for pixmaps.  GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
3855              shared  memory support, and the display must support the MIT-SHM
3856              extension.  Otherwise, this option is ignored.  The  default  is
3857              True.
3858
3859       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
3860              sharpen the image
3861
3862              Use  a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
3863              tion (sigma).
3864
3865       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
3866              shave pixels from the image edges
3867
3868              Specify the width of the region to be removed from both sides of
3869              the  image  and the height of the regions to be removed from top
3870              and bottom.
3871
3872       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
3873              shear the image along the X or Y axis
3874
3875              Use the specified positive or negative shear angle.
3876
3877              Shearing slides one edge of an image along the X or Y axis, cre‐
3878              ating a parallelogram. An X direction shear slides an edge along
3879              the X axis, while a Y direction shear slides an edge along the Y
3880              axis.  The  amount  of the shear is controlled by a shear angle.
3881              For X direction shears, x degrees is measured relative to the  Y
3882              axis,  and  similarly,  for Y direction shears y degrees is mea‐
3883              sured relative to the X axis.
3884
3885              Empty triangles left over from shearing  the  image  are  filled
3886              with  the  color  defined as background (class backgroundColor).
3887              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3888              -fill option.
3889
3890       -silent
3891              operate silently
3892
3893       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
3894              width and height of the image
3895
3896              Use  this  option  to specify the width and height of raw images
3897              whose dimensions are unknown such as  GRAY,  RGB,  or  CMYK.  In
3898              addition  to  width and height, use -size with an offset to skip
3899              any header information in the image or tell the number of colors
3900              in a MAP image file, (e.g. -size 640x512+256).
3901
3902              For Photo CD images, choose from these sizes:
3903
3904                   192x128
3905                   384x256
3906                   768x512
3907                   1536x1024
3908                   3072x2048
3909
3910
3911              Finally, use this option to choose a particular resolution layer
3912              of a JBIG or JPEG image (e.g. -size 1024x768).
3913
3914       -snaps <value>
3915              number of screen snapshots
3916
3917              Use this option to grab more than one image from  the  X  server
3918              screen, to create an animation sequence.
3919
3920       -solarize <factor>
3921              negate all pixels above the threshold level
3922
3923              Specify  factor  as  the percent threshold of the intensity (0 -
3924              99.9%).
3925
3926              This option produces a solarization effect seen when exposing  a
3927              photographic film to light during the development process.
3928
3929       -spread <amount>
3930              displace image pixels by a random amount
3931
3932              Amount defines the size of the neighborhood around each pixel to
3933              choose a candidate pixel to swap.
3934
3935       -stegano <offset>
3936              hide watermark within an image
3937
3938              Use an offset to start the image hiding some  number  of  pixels
3939              from the beginning of the image.  Note this offset and the image
3940              size.  You will need this information to  recover  the  stegano‐
3941              graphic image (e.g. display -size 320x256+35 stegano:image.png).
3942
3943       -stereo
3944              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
3945
3946              The  left side of the stereo pair is saved as the red channel of
3947              the output image.  The right side is saved as the green channel.
3948              Red-green  stereo  glasses  are  required  to  properly view the
3949              stereo image.
3950
3951       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
3952
3953              All embedded profiles and text attributes are stripped from  the
3954              image.  This is useful for images used for the web, or when out‐
3955              put files need to be as small as possible
3956
3957              Be careful not to use this option to remove  author,  copyright,
3958              and  license  information  that  you are required to retain when
3959              redistributing an image.
3960
3961       -stroke <color>
3962              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
3963
3964              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3965              -fill option.
3966
3967              See -draw for further details.
3968
3969       -strokewidth <value>
3970              set the stroke width
3971
3972              See -draw for further details.
3973
3974       -swirl <degrees>
3975              swirl image pixels about the center
3976
3977              Degrees defines the tightness of the swirl.
3978
3979       -text-font <name>
3980              font for writing fixed-width text
3981
3982              Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
3983              writer style) formatted text.  The default is 14 point Courier.
3984
3985              You can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript,  True‐
3986              Type,  or X11 font.  For example, Courier.ttf is a TrueType font
3987              and x:fixed is X11.
3988
3989       -texture <filename>
3990              name of texture to tile onto the image background
3991
3992       -threshold <value>{%}
3993              threshold the image
3994
3995              Modify the image such that any pixel sample  with  an  intensity
3996              value  greater than the threshold is assigned the maximum inten‐
3997              sity (white), or otherwise is  assigned  the  minimum  intensity
3998              (black). If a percent prefix is applied, then the threshold is a
3999              percentage of the available range.
4000
4001              To efficiently create a black  and  white  image  from  a  color
4002              image, use
4003
4004                  gm convert -threshold 50% in.png out.png
4005
4006
4007              The  optimum threshold value depends on the nature of the image.
4008              In order to threshold individual  channels,  use  the  -operator
4009              subcommand  with  it's Threshold, Threshold-White, or Threshold-
4010              Black options.
4011
4012       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
4013              resize an image (quickly)
4014
4015              The -thumbnail command resizes the image as quickly as possible,
4016              with  more  concern  for  speed  than  resulting  image quality.
4017              Regardless, resulting image quality  should  be  acceptable  for
4018              many  uses.   It  is  primarily  intended to be used to generate
4019              smaller versions of the image, but may also be used  to  enlarge
4020              the  image.   The -thumbnail geometry argument observes the same
4021              syntax and rules as it does for -resize.
4022
4023       -tile <filename>
4024              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
4025
4026       -tile <geometry>
4027              layout of images [montage]
4028
4029       -title <string>
4030              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4031
4032              Use this option to assign a specific title to the image. This is
4033              assigned  to  the image window and is typically displayed in the
4034              window title bar.  Optionally you can include  the  image  file‐
4035              name,  type,  width, height, Exif data, or other image attribute
4036              by embedding special format characters described under the -for‐
4037              mat option.
4038
4039              For example,
4040
4041                   -title "%m:%f %wx%h"
4042
4043
4044              produces  an  image title of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
4045              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
4046
4047       -transform
4048              transform the image
4049
4050              This option applies the transformation matrix  from  a  previous
4051              -affine option.
4052
4053                  gm convert -affine 2,2,-2,2,0,0 -transform bird.ppm bird.jpg
4054
4055
4056       -transparent <color>
4057              make this color transparent within the image
4058
4059              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
4060              -fill option.
4061
4062       -treedepth <value>
4063              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4064
4065              Normally, this integer value is zero or one. A value of zero  or
4066              one causes the use of an optimal tree depth for the color reduc‐
4067              tion algorithm
4068
4069              An optimal depth generally allows the best representation of the
4070              source  image with the fastest computational speed and the least
4071              amount of memory.  However, the default depth  is  inappropriate
4072              for  some  images. To assure the best representation, try values
4073              between 2 and 8 for this parameter.  Refer to quantize for  more
4074              details.
4075
4076              The -colors or -monochrome option, or writing to an image format
4077              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
4078              take effect.
4079
4080       -trim  trim an image
4081
4082              This option removes any edges that are exactly the same color as
4083              the corner pixels.  Use -fuzz to make -trim  remove  edges  that
4084              are nearly the same color as the corner pixels.
4085
4086       -type <type>
4087              the image type
4088
4089              Choose  from:  Bilevel,  Grayscale, Palette, PaletteMatte, True‐
4090              Color, TrueColorMatte, ColorSeparation, ColorSeparationMatte, or
4091              Optimize.
4092
4093              Normally,  when  a  format supports different subformats such as
4094              bilevel, grayscale, palette, truecolor, and truecolor+alpha, the
4095              encoder  will  try  to  choose a suitable subformat based on the
4096              nature of the image. The -type option may be used to tailor  the
4097              output  subformat.  By  default the output subformat is based on
4098              readily available image information and is  usually  similar  to
4099              the input format.
4100
4101              Specify  -type Optimize in order to enable inspecting all pixels
4102              (if necessary) in order to find the  most  efficient  subformat.
4103              Inspecting  all of the pixels may be slow for very large images,
4104              particularly if they are stored in a disk cache. If an RGB image
4105              contains only gray pixels, then every pixel in the image must be
4106              inspected  in  order  to  decide  that  the  image  is  actually
4107              grayscale!
4108
4109              Sometimes a specific subformat is desired. For example, to force
4110              a JPEG image to be written in TrueColor RGB format  even  though
4111              only gray pixels are present, use
4112
4113                  gm convert bird.pgm -type TrueColor bird.jpg
4114
4115
4116              Similarly,  using -type TrueColorMatte will force the encoder to
4117              write an alpha channel even though the image is opaque,  if  the
4118              output format supports transparency.
4119
4120              Some  pseudo-formats  (e.g.  the  XC  format)  will  respect the
4121              requested type if it occurs previously on the command line.  For
4122              example, to obtain a DirectClass solid color canvas image rather
4123              than PsuedoClass, use
4124
4125                  gm convert -size 640x480 -type TrueColor xc:red red.miff
4126
4127
4128              Likewise, specify -type Bilevel, Grayscale, TrueColor, or  True‐
4129              ColorMatte  prior to reading a Postscript (or PDF file) in order
4130              to influence the type of image that Ghostcript returns.  Reading
4131              performance  will be dramatically improved for black/white Post‐
4132              script if Bilevel is specified, and will be considerably  faster
4133              if Grayscale is specified.
4134
4135       -update <seconds>
4136               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
4137
4138              Suppose  that while you are displaying an image the file that is
4139              currently displayed is over-written.  display will automatically
4140              detect  that the input file has been changed and update the dis‐
4141              played image accordingly.
4142
4143       -units <type>
4144              the units of image resolution
4145
4146              Choose from: Undefined, PixelsPerInch,  or  PixelsPerCentimeter.
4147              This  option  is  normally used in conjunction with the -density
4148              option.
4149
4150       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
4151              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
4152
4153              The -unsharp option sharpens an image. The  image  is  convolved
4154              with a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
4155              tion (sigma). For reasonable results, radius  should  be  larger
4156              than  sigma. Use a radius of 0 to have the method select a suit‐
4157              able radius.
4158
4159              The parameters are:
4160
4161
4162               radius
4163
4164
4165                    The radius of the Gaussian, in pixels,  not  counting  the
4166                    center pixel (default 0).
4167
4168               sigma
4169
4170
4171                    The standard deviation of the Gaussian, in pixels (default
4172                    1.0).
4173
4174               amount
4175
4176
4177                    The percentage of the difference between the original  and
4178                    the  blur  image  that  is  added  back  into the original
4179                    (default 1.0).
4180
4181               threshold
4182
4183
4184                    The threshold, as a fraction of MaxRGB,  needed  to  apply
4185                    the difference amount (default 0.05).
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190       -use-pixmap
4191              use the pixmap
4192
4193       -verbose
4194              print detailed information about the image
4195
4196              This  information  is  printed:  image scene number; image name;
4197              image size; the image class (DirectClass  or  PseudoClass);  the
4198              total number of unique colors; and the number of seconds to read
4199              and transform the image. If the image is DirectClass, the  total
4200              number  of  unique  colors  is  not displayed unless -verbose is
4201              specified twice since it may take quite a long time to  compute,
4202              particularly  for deep images.  If the image is PseudoClass then
4203              its pixels are defined by indexes into a colormap. If the  image
4204              is  DirectClass then each pixel includes a complete and indepen‐
4205              dent color specification.
4206
4207              If -colors is also specified, the total  unique  colors  in  the
4208              image  and  color  reduction  error values are printed. Refer to
4209              quantize for a description of these values.
4210
4211       -version
4212              print GraphicsMagick version string
4213
4214       -view <string>
4215              FlashPix viewing parameters
4216
4217       -virtual-pixel <method>
4218              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
4219
4220              This option defines "virtual pixels" for use in operations  that
4221              can access pixels outside the boundaries of an image.
4222
4223              Choose from these methods:
4224
4225
4226               Constant
4227
4228
4229                    Use the image background color.
4230
4231               Edge
4232
4233
4234                    Extend the edge pixel toward infinity (default).
4235
4236               Mirror
4237
4238
4239                    Mirror the image.
4240
4241               Tile
4242
4243
4244                    Tile the image.
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249               This  option affects operations that use virtual pixels such as
4250               -blur, -sharpen, -wave, etc.
4251
4252       -visual <type>
4253              animate images using this X visual type
4254
4255              Choose from these visual classes:
4256
4257                   StaticGray
4258                   GrayScale
4259                   StaticColor
4260                   PseudoColor
4261                   TrueColor
4262                   DirectColor
4263                   default
4264                   visual id
4265
4266
4267              The X server must support the visual you  choose,  otherwise  an
4268              error  occurs.   If  a visual is not specified, the visual class
4269              that can display the most simultaneous  colors  on  the  default
4270              screen is chosen.
4271
4272       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
4273              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
4274
4275       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
4276              alter an image along a sine wave
4277
4278              Specify amplitude and wavelength of the wave.
4279
4280       -white-point <x>,<y>
4281              chromaticity white point
4282
4283       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
4284              pixels above the threshold become white
4285
4286              Use  -white-threshold to set pixels with values above the speci‐
4287              fied threshold to maximum value (white). If only  one  value  is
4288              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
4289              intensity thresholding is used. If the  color  threshold  values
4290              are  not  identical then channel-based thresholding is used, and
4291              color distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g.  -1)
4292              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
4293              a channel later  in  the  list.  If  a  percent  (%)  symbol  is
4294              appended, then the values are treated as a percentage of maximum
4295              range.
4296
4297       -window <id>
4298              make image the background of a window
4299
4300              id can be a window id or name.  Specify root to select X's  root
4301              window as the target window.
4302
4303              By  default the image is tiled onto the background of the target
4304              window.   If backdrop or -geometry are specified, the  image  is
4305              surrounded  by  the  background color.  Refer to X RESOURCES for
4306              details.
4307
4308              The image will not display on the root window if the  image  has
4309              more  unique colors than the target window colormap allows.  Use
4310              -colors to reduce the number of colors.
4311
4312       -window-group
4313              specify the window group
4314
4315       -write <filename>
4316              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
4317
4318              The current image is written to the specified filename and  then
4319              processing continues using that image. The following is an exam‐
4320              ple of how several sizes of an image may  be  generated  in  one
4321              command (repeat as often as needed):
4322
4323                  gm convert input.jpg -resize 50% -write input50.jpg \
4324                            -resize 25% input25.jpg
4325
4326
4327       -write <filename>
4328              write the image to a file [display]
4329
4330              If  filename  already exists, you will be prompted as to whether
4331              it should be overwritten.
4332
4333              By default, the image is written in the format that it was  read
4334              in  as.   To  specify a particular image format, prefix filename
4335              with the image type and a colon (e.g., ps:image) or specify  the
4336              image type as the filename suffix (e.g., image.ps). Specify file
4337              as - for standard output. If file has the extension .Z  or  .gz,
4338              the file size is compressed using compress or gzip respectively.
4339              Precede the image file name with | to pipe to a system command.
4340
4341              Use -compress to specify the type of image compression.
4342
4343              The equivalent X  resource  for  this  option  is  writeFilename
4344              (class WriteFilename).  See "X Resources", below, for details.
4345

ENVIRONMENT

4347       COLUMNS
4348              Output  screen  width. Used when formatting text for the screen.
4349              Many Unix systems keep this shell variable up to  date,  but  it
4350              may  need  to be explicitly exported in order for GraphicsMagick
4351              to see it.
4352
4353       DISPLAY
4354              X11 display ID (host, display number, and  screen  in  the  form
4355              hostname:display.screen).
4356
4357       HOME   Location  of  user's  home  directory. For security reasons, now
4358              only observed by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do
4359              not have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.  When
4360              supported, GraphicsMagick searches for  configuration  files  in
4361              $HOME/.magick  if  the  directory  exists. See MAGICK_CODER_MOD‐
4362              ULE_PATH, MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH,  and  MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4363              if more flexibility is needed.
4364
4365       MAGICK_ACCESS_MONITOR
4366              When  set  to TRUE, command line monitor mode (enabled by -moni‐
4367              tor) will also show files accessed (including  temporary  files)
4368              and any external commands which are executed. This is useful for
4369              debugging, but also illustrates arguments made available  to  an
4370              access handler registered by the MagickSetConfirmAccessHandler()
4371              C library function.
4372
4373       MAGICK_CODER_STABILITY
4374              The minimum coder stability level before it will  be  used.  The
4375              available levels are PRIMARY, STABLE, UNSTABLE, and BROKEN.  The
4376              default minimum level is UNSTABLE, which means that  all  avail‐
4377              able  working coders will be used. The purpose of this option is
4378              to reduce the security exposure (or apparent complexity) due  to
4379              the  huge  number  of  formats  supported. Coders at the PRIMARY
4380              level are commonly used formats with very well maintained imple‐
4381              mentations. Coders at the STABLE level are reasonably well main‐
4382              tained but represent less used formats. Coders at  the  UNSTABLE
4383              level  either  have weak implementations, the file format itself
4384              is weak, or the probability the coder will be needed is  vanish‐
4385              ingly  small.  Coders at the BROKEN level are known to often not
4386              work properly or might not be useful in their current  state  at
4387              all.
4388
4389       MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH
4390              Search  path  to  use when searching for image format coder mod‐
4391              ules.  This path allows the user to arbitrarily extend the image
4392              formats  supported  by GraphicsMagick by adding loadable modules
4393              to an arbitrary location  rather  than  copying  them  into  the
4394              GraphicsMagick  installation  directory.  The  formatting of the
4395              search path is similar to operating system  search  paths  (i.e.
4396              colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited for Microsoft
4397              Windows). This user specified search path is used before  trying
4398              the default search path.
4399
4400       MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH
4401              Search  path  to  use  when  searching  for configuration (.mgk)
4402              files.  The formatting of the search path is similar to  operat‐
4403              ing  system  search  paths  (i.e.  colon delimited for Unix, and
4404              semi-colon delimited for Microsoft Windows). This user specified
4405              search path is used before trying the default search path.
4406
4407       MAGICK_DEBUG
4408              Debug  options  (see -debug for details).  Setting the configure
4409              debug option via an environment variable (e.g. MAGICK_DEBUG=con‐
4410              figure) is necessary to see the complete initialization process,
4411              which includes searching for configuration files.
4412
4413       MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4414              Search path to use when searching  for  filter  process  modules
4415              (invoked via -process). This path allows the user to arbitrarily
4416              extend GraphicsMagick's image processing functionality by adding
4417              loadable  modules  to  an arbitrary location rather than copying
4418              them into the GraphicsMagick installation directory. The format‐
4419              ting  of  the  search path is similar to operating system search
4420              paths (i.e. colon delimited for Unix, and  semi-colon  delimited
4421              for  Microsoft Windows). This user specified search path is used
4422              before trying the default search path.
4423
4424       MAGICK_GHOSTSCRIPT_PATH
4425              For Microsoft Windows,  specify  the  path  to  the  Ghostscript
4426              installation  rather  than searching for it via the Windows reg‐
4427              istry.  This helps in case Ghostscript is not installed via  the
4428              Ghostscript  Windows  installer  or  the user wants more control
4429              over the Ghostscript used.
4430
4431       MAGICK_HOME
4432              Path to  top  of  GraphicsMagick  installation  directory.  Only
4433              observed  by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do not
4434              have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.
4435
4436       MAGICK_MMAP_READ
4437              If MAGICK_MMAP_READ is set to TRUE, GraphicsMagick will  attempt
4438              to  memory-map the input file for reading. This usually substan‐
4439              tially improves repeated read  performance  since  the  file  is
4440              already  in  memory  after the first time it has been read. How‐
4441              ever, testing shows that performance may be  reduced  for  files
4442              accessed  for  the  first  time since data is accessed via page-
4443              faults (upon first access) and many operating systems fail to do
4444              sequential  read-ahead  of memory mapped files, and particularly
4445              if those files are accessed over a network.  If many large input
4446              files  are  read, then enabling this option may harm performance
4447              by overloading the operating system's VM system as it then needs
4448              to free unmapped pages and map new ones.
4449
4450       MAGICK_IO_FSYNC
4451              If  MAGICK_IO_FSYNC  is  set  to  TRUE, then GraphicsMagick will
4452              request that the output file is fully flushed  and  synchronized
4453              to  disk  when  it is closed. This incurs a performance penalty,
4454              but has the benefit that  if  the  power  fails  or  the  system
4455              crashes,  the  file  should be valid on disk. If image files are
4456              referenced from a database, then this option helps  assure  that
4457              the files referenced by the database are valid.
4458
4459       MAGICK_IOBUF_SIZE
4460              The  amount  of I/O buffering (in bytes) to use when reading and
4461              writing encoded files. The default is 16384, which  is  observed
4462              to work well for many cases. The best value for a local filesys‐
4463              tem is usually the the native filesystem block size (e.g.  4096,
4464              8192,  or  even 131,072 for ZFS) in order to minimize the number
4465              of physical disk  I/O  operations.   I/O  performance  to  files
4466              accessed over a network may benefit significantly by tuning this
4467              option. Larger values are not necessarily better  (they  may  be
4468              slower!),  and  there  is  rarely  any benefit from using values
4469              larger than 32768. Use convert's -verbose  option  in  order  to
4470              evaluate read and write rates in pixels per second while keeping
4471              in mind that the operating system will try  to  cache  files  in
4472              RAM.
4473
4474       MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK
4475              Maximum amount of disk space allowed for use by the pixel cache.
4476
4477       MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES
4478              Maximum number of open files.
4479
4480       MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP
4481              Maximum  size  of  a  memory  mapped  file allocation.  A memory
4482              mapped file consumes memory when the file is accessed,  although
4483              the system may reclaim such memory when needed.
4484
4485       MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY
4486              Maximum amount of memory to allocate from the heap.
4487
4488       MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS
4489              Maximum  number  of total pixels (image rows times image colums)
4490              to allow for any image which is requested to be created or read.
4491              This  is  useful  to place a limit on how large an image may be.
4492              If the input image file has image  dimensions  larger  than  the
4493              pixel  limit,  then the image memory allocation is denied and an
4494              error is returned immediately.  This is a  per-image  limit  and
4495              does  not limit the total number of pixels due to multiple image
4496              frames/pages (e.g. multi-page document or an animation).
4497
4498       MAGICK_LIMIT_WIDTH
4499              Maximum pixel width of an image read, or created.
4500
4501       MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT
4502              Maximum pixel height of an image read, or created.
4503
4504       MAGICK_TMPDIR
4505              Path to directory where GraphicsMagick  should  write  temporary
4506              files. The default is to use the system default, or the location
4507              set by TMPDIR.
4508
4509       TMPDIR For POSIX-compatible systems (Unix-compatible), the path to  the
4510              directory  where  all applications should write temporary files.
4511              Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR if it is set.
4512
4513       TMP or TEMP
4514              For Microsoft Windows, the path to the directory where  applica‐
4515              tions  should write temporary files. Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR
4516              if it is set.
4517
4518       OMP_NUM_THREADS
4519              As per the OpenMP standard, this specifies the number of threads
4520              to use in parallel regions. Some compilers default the number of
4521              threads to use to the number of processor cores available  while
4522              others  default to just one thread. See the OpenMP specification
4523              for other standard adjustments and your  compiler's  manual  for
4524              vendor-specific settings.
4525

CONFIGURATION FILES

4527       GraphicsMagick uses a number of XML format configuration files:
4528
4529       colors.mgk
4530              colors configuration file
4531
4532                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4533                <colormap>
4534                  <color name="AliceBlue" red="240" green="248" blue="255"
4535                         compliance="SVG, X11, XPM" />
4536                </colormap>
4537
4538
4539       delegates.mgk
4540              delegates configuration file
4541
4542       log.mgk
4543              logging configuration file
4544
4545                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4546                <magicklog>
4547                  <log events="None" />
4548                  <log output="stdout" />
4549                  <log filename="Magick-%d.log" />
4550                  <log generations="3" />
4551                  <log limit="2000" />
4552                  <log format="%t %r %u %p %m/%f/%l/%d:\n  %e"  />
4553                </magicklog>
4554
4555
4556       modules.mgk
4557              loadable modules configuration file
4558
4559                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4560                <modulemap>
4561                  <module magick="8BIM" name="META" />
4562                </modulemap>
4563
4564
4565       type.mgk
4566              master type (fonts) configuration file
4567
4568                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4569                <typemap>
4570                  <include file="type-windows.mgk" />
4571                  <type
4572                    name="AvantGarde-Book"
4573                    fullname="AvantGarde Book"
4574                    family="AvantGarde"
4575                    foundry="URW"
4576                    weight="400"
4577                    style="normal"
4578                    stretch="normal"
4579                    format="type1"
4580                    metrics="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.afm"
4581                    glyphs="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.pfb"
4582                  />
4583                </typemap>
4584
4585

GM ANIMATE

4587       Animate  displays  a sequence of images on any workstation display run‐
4588       ning an X server. animate first determines the hardware capabilities of
4589       the  workstation.  If  the  number of unique colors in an image is less
4590       than or equal to the number the workstation can support, the  image  is
4591       displayed  in  an X window. Otherwise the number of colors in the image
4592       is first reduced to match  the  color  resolution  of  the  workstation
4593       before it is displayed.
4594
4595       This  means  that a continuous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel image can display
4596       on a 8 bit pseudo-color device or monochrome device. In most  instances
4597       the  reduced color image closely resembles the original. Alternatively,
4598       a monochrome or pseudo-color image sequence can display on  a  continu‐
4599       ous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel device.
4600
4601       To help prevent color flashing on X server visuals that have colormaps,
4602       animate creates a single colormap from the image sequence. This can  be
4603       rather  time consuming. You can speed this operation up by reducing the
4604       colors in the image before you "animate" them.  Use  mogrify  to  color
4605       reduce  the  images  to  a single colormap. See mogrify(1) for details.
4606       Alternatively, you can use a Standard Colormap; or a static, direct, or
4607       true  color  visual.  You can define a Standard Colormap with xstdcmap.
4608       See xstdcmap(1) for details. This method is recommended for colormapped
4609       X server because it eliminates the need to compute a global colormap.
4610

EXAMPLES

4612       To animate a set of images of a cockatoo, use:
4613
4614           gm animate cockatoo.*
4615
4616
4617       To  animate a cockatoo image sequence while using the Standard Colormap
4618       best, use:
4619
4620           xstdcmap -best
4621           gm animate -map best cockatoo.*
4622
4623
4624       To animate an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a  back‐
4625       drop, use:
4626
4627
4628           gm animate +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.*
4629
4630

OPTIONS

4632       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
4633
4634
4635       -authenticate <string>
4636              decrypt image with this password
4637
4638       -backdrop
4639              display the image centered on a backdrop.
4640
4641       -background <color>
4642              the background color
4643
4644       -bordercolor <color>
4645              the border color
4646
4647       -borderwidth <geometry>
4648              the border width
4649
4650       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4651              remove pixels from the interior of an image
4652
4653       -colormap <type>
4654              define the colormap type
4655
4656       -colors <value>
4657              preferred number of colors in the image
4658
4659       -colorspace <value>
4660              the type of colorspace
4661
4662       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4663              preferred size and location of the cropped image
4664
4665       -debug <events>
4666              enable debug printout
4667
4668       -define <key>{=<value>},...
4669              add coder/decoder specific options
4670
4671       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
4672              display the next image after pausing
4673
4674       -density <width>x<height>
4675              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
4676
4677       -depth <value>
4678              depth of the image
4679
4680       -display <host:display[.screen]>
4681              specifies the X server to contact
4682
4683       -dispose <method>
4684              GIF disposal method
4685
4686       -dither
4687              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
4688
4689       -font <name>
4690              use this font when annotating the image with text
4691
4692       -foreground <color>
4693              define the foreground color
4694
4695       -gamma <value>
4696              level of gamma correction
4697
4698       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
4699              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
4700
4701       -help  print usage instructions
4702
4703       -iconGeometry <geometry>
4704              specify the icon geometry
4705
4706       -iconic
4707              iconic animation
4708
4709       -interlace <type>
4710              the type of interlacing scheme
4711
4712       -limit <type> <value>
4713              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
4714              resource limit
4715
4716       -log <string>
4717              Specify format for debug log
4718
4719       -map <type>
4720              display image using this type.
4721
4722       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
4723
4724       -mattecolor <color>
4725              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
4726
4727       -monitor
4728              show progress indication
4729
4730       -monochrome
4731              transform the image to black and white
4732
4733       -name  name an image
4734
4735       -noop  NOOP (no option)
4736
4737       -pause <seconds>
4738              pause between animation loops [animate]
4739
4740       -remote
4741              perform a X11 remote operation
4742
4743       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
4744              rotate the image
4745
4746       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
4747              chroma subsampling factors
4748
4749       -scenes <value-value>
4750              range of image scene numbers to read
4751
4752       -shared-memory
4753              use shared memory
4754
4755       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
4756              width and height of the image
4757
4758       -text-font <name>
4759              font for writing fixed-width text
4760
4761       -title <string>
4762              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4763
4764       -treedepth <value>
4765              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4766
4767       -trim  trim an image
4768
4769       -type <type>
4770              the image type
4771
4772       -verbose
4773              print detailed information about the image
4774
4775       -version
4776              print GraphicsMagick version string
4777
4778       -visual <type>
4779              animate images using this X visual type
4780
4781       -window <id>
4782              make image the background of a window
4783
4784              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
4785              above.
4786
4787
4788              Any option you specify on the command line remains in effect for
4789              the group of images following it, until the group is  terminated
4790              by  the appearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to ani‐
4791              mate three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with  an
4792              unlimited  number  of colors, and the third with only 16 colors,
4793              use:
4794
4795
4796                  gm animate -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
4797                           -colors 16 cockatoo.3
4798
4799
4800              Animate options can appear on the command  line  or  in  your  X
4801              resources  file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede
4802              values specified in your X resources file.  Image filenames  may
4803              appear  in  any order on the command line if the image format is
4804              MIFF (refer to miff(5) and the scene keyword is specified in the
4805              image.  Otherwise  the  images  will  display  in the order they
4806              appear on the command line.
4807

MOUSE BUTTONS

4809       Press any button to map or unmap the Command widget. See the next  sec‐
4810       tion for more information about the Command widget.
4811

COMMAND WIDGET

4813       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
4814
4815           Animate
4816
4817               Open
4818               Play
4819               Step
4820               Repeat
4821               Auto Reverse
4822
4823           Speed
4824
4825               Faster
4826               Slower
4827
4828           Direction
4829
4830               Forward
4831               Reverse
4832
4833           Image Info
4834           Help
4835           Quit
4836
4837
4838       Menu  items  with  a indented triangle have a sub-menu. They are repre‐
4839       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
4840       pointer  to  the appropriate menu and press a button and drag. When you
4841       find the desired sub-menu item, release the button and the  command  is
4842       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
4843       execute a particular command.
4844

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

4846               Ctl+O
4847
4848                    Press to load an image from a file.
4849               space
4850
4851                    Press to display the next image in the sequence.
4852               <
4853
4854                    Press to speed-up the display of  the  images.   Refer  to
4855                    -delay for more information.
4856               >
4857
4858                    Press  to slow the display of the images.  Refer to -delay
4859                    for more information.
4860               ?
4861
4862                    Press to display information about the image.   Press  any
4863                    key or button to erase the information.
4864                    This  information is printed: image name;  image size; and
4865                    the total number of unique colors in the image.
4866               F1
4867
4868                    Press to display helpful information about animate(1).
4869               Ctl-q
4870
4871                    Press to discard all images and exit program.
4872
4873

X RESOURCES

4875       Animate options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
4876       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
4877       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
4878
4879       All animate options have a corresponding X resource. In  addition,  the
4880       animate program uses the following X resources:
4881
4882               background (class Background)
4883
4884
4885                    Specifies  the preferred color to use for the Image window
4886                    background. The default is #ccc.
4887               borderColor (class BorderColor)
4888
4889
4890                    Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image  window
4891                    border. The default is #ccc.
4892               borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
4893
4894
4895                    Specifies  the width in pixels of the Image window border.
4896                    The default is 2.
4897               font (class Font or FontList)
4898
4899
4900                    Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in  normal
4901                    formatted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
4902               foreground (class Foreground)
4903
4904
4905                    Specifies  the  preferred color to use for text within the
4906                    Image window.  The default is black.
4907               geometry (class geometry)
4908
4909
4910                    Specifies the preferred size and  position  of  the  image
4911                    window.  It  is  not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
4912                    agers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.  A
4913                    negative  x  offset is measured from the right edge of the
4914                    screen to the right edge of the icon,  and  a  negative  y
4915                    offset  is  measured from the bottom edge of the screen to
4916                    the bottom edge of the icon.
4917               iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
4918
4919
4920                    Specifies the preferred size and position of the  applica‐
4921                    tion  when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all
4922                    window managers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in  the
4923                    same manner as in class Geometry.
4924               iconic (class Iconic)
4925
4926
4927                    This  resource  indicates  that  you would prefer that the
4928                    application's windows initially not be visible as  if  the
4929                    windows  had  be immediately iconified by you. Window man‐
4930                    agers may choose not to honor the application's request.
4931               matteColor (class MatteColor)
4932
4933
4934                    Specify the color of windows. It is  used  for  the  back‐
4935                    grounds  of  windows,  menus,  and notices. A 3D effect is
4936                    achieved by using highlight and shadow colors derived from
4937                    this color. Default value: #ddd.
4938               name (class Name)
4939
4940
4941                    This resource specifies the name under which resources for
4942                    the application should be found. This resource  is  useful
4943                    in  shell aliases to distinguish between invocations of an
4944                    application, without resorting to creating links to  alter
4945                    the  executable  file name. The default is the application
4946                    name.
4947               sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
4948
4949
4950                    This resource specifies whether animate should attempt use
4951                    shared  memory  for  pixmaps. ImageMagick must be compiled
4952                    with shared memory support, and the display  must  support
4953                    the   MIT-SHM   extension.  Otherwise,  this  resource  is
4954                    ignored. The default is True.
4955               text_font (class textFont)
4956
4957
4958                    Specifies the name of the preferred font to use  in  fixed
4959                    (typewriter style) formatted text. The default is 14 point
4960                    Courier.
4961               title (class Title)
4962
4963
4964                    This resource specifies the title to be used for the Image
4965                    window.  This  information  is  sometimes used by a window
4966                    manager to provide some sort  of  header  identifying  the
4967                    window. The default is the image file name.
4968
4969

GM BATCH

DESCRIPTION

4972       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
4973       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
4974       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
4975       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
4976

EXAMPLES

4978        To drive 'gm batch' using a shell script (or a program written in  any
4979       language),  have the script/program send commands to 'gm batch' via its
4980       standard input.  Specify that standard input should be  used  by  using
4981       '-'  as the file name.  The following example converts all files match‐
4982       ing '*.jpg' to TIFF format while rotating each file by 90  degrees  and
4983       stripping  all  embedded profiles.  The shell script syntax is standard
4984       Unix shell:
4985
4986         for file in *.jpg
4987         do
4988           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4989           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4990           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4991         done | gm batch -echo on -feedback on -
4992
4993
4994       We can accomplish the same as the previous example by putting  all  the
4995       commands  in  a text file and then specifying the name of the text file
4996       as the script to execute:
4997
4998         for file in *.jpg
4999         do
5000           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
5001           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
5002           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
5003         done > script.txt
5004         gm batch -echo on -feedback on script.txt
5005
5006

OPTIONS

5008       Options are processed from left to right and  must  appear  before  any
5009       filename argument.
5010
5011       -echo on|off
5012              command echo on or off
5013
5014              Specify on to enable echoing commands to standard output as they
5015              are read or off to disable.  The default is off.
5016
5017       -escape unix|windows
5018              Parse using unix or windows syntax
5019
5020              Commands must be parsed from the input stream and escaping needs
5021              to be used to protect spaces or quoting characters in the input.
5022              Specify unix to use unix-style command line parsing  or  windows
5023              for  Microsoft  Windows command shell style parsing. The default
5024              depends on if the software is compiled for Microsoft Windows  or
5025              for  a Unix-type system (including Cygwin on Microsoft Windows).
5026              It is recommended to use unix syntax because it is more powerful
5027              and more portable.
5028
5029       -fail text
5030              text to print if a command fails
5031
5032              When  feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print when
5033              the command fails.  The default text is FAIL.
5034
5035       -feedback on|off
5036              enable error feedback
5037
5038              Print text (see -pass and -fail  options)  feedback  after  each
5039              command to indicate the result, the default is off.
5040
5041       -help
5042
5043              Prints batch command help.
5044
5045       -pass text
5046              text to print if a command passes
5047
5048              When  feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print when
5049              the command passes.  The default text is PASS.
5050
5051       -prompt text
5052              Prompt text to use for command line
5053
5054              If no filename argument was specified, a simple  command  prompt
5055              appears  where  you  may  enter  GraphicsMagick  commands.   The
5056              default prompt is GM>.  Use this option to change the prompt  to
5057              something else.
5058
5059       -stop-on-error on|off
5060              Specify if command processing stops on error
5061
5062              Normally command processing continues if a command encounters an
5063              error.  Specify -stop-on-error on to cause  processing  to  quit
5064              immediately on error.
5065

GM BENCHMARK

DESCRIPTION

5068       benchmark  executes  an arbitrary gm utility command (e.g. convert) for
5069       one or more loops, and/or a specified execution time, and reports  many
5070       execution metrics.  For builds using OpenMP, a mode is provided to exe‐
5071       cute the benchmark with an increasing number of threads and  provide  a
5072       report  of speedup and multi-thread execution efficiency.  If benchmark
5073       is used to execute a command without any additional benchmark  options,
5074       then the command is run once.
5075

EXAMPLES

5077       To obtain benchmark information for a single execution of a command:
5078
5079           gm benchmark convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5080
5081       To obtain benchmark information from 100 iterations of the command:
5082
5083           gm benchmark -iterations 100 convert input.ppm \
5084             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5085
5086       To obtain benchmark information by iterating the command until a speci‐
5087       fied amount of time (in seconds) has been consumed:
5088
5089           gm benchmark -duration 30 convert input.ppm \
5090             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5091
5092       To obtain a full  performance  report  with  an  increasing  number  of
5093       threads  (1-32  threads,  stepping  the  number of threads by four each
5094       time):
5095
5096           gm benchmark -duration 3 -stepthreads 4 convert \
5097             input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
5098
5099       Here is the interpretation of the output:
5100
5101           threads - number of threads used.
5102           iter - number of command iterations executed.
5103           user - total user time consumed.
5104           total - total elapsed time consumed.
5105           iter/s - number of command iterations per second.
5106           iter/cpu - amount of CPU time consumed per iteration.
5107           speedup - speedup compared with one thread.
5108           karp-flatt - Karp-Flatt measure of speedup efficiency.
5109
5110       Please note that the reported "speedup" is based on the execution  time
5111       of  just  one thread.  A preliminary warm-up pass is used before timing
5112       the first loop in order to ensure that the CPU is brought out of power-
5113       saving  modes  and  that system caches are warmed up.  Most modern CPUs
5114       provide a "turbo" mode where the CPU clock speed is increased (e.g.  by
5115       a  factor  of  two)  when only one or two cores are active.  If the CPU
5116       grows excessively hot (due to insufficient cooling), then it  may  dial
5117       back  its  clock  rates as a form of thermal management.  These factors
5118       result in an under-reporting of speedup compared to if "turbo" mode was
5119       disabled  and  the CPU does not need to worry about thermal management.
5120       The powertop utility available under Linux and Solaris provides  a  way
5121       to observe CPU core clock rates while a benchmark is running.
5122

OPTIONS

5124        Options  are  processed  from left to right and must appear before any
5125       argument.
5126
5127       -duration duration
5128              duration to run benchmark Specify the number of seconds  to  run
5129              the  benchmark.  The  command  is  executed repeatedly until the
5130              specified amount of time has elapsed.
5131
5132       -help
5133
5134              Prints benchmark command help.
5135
5136       -iterations loops
5137              number of command iterations Specify the number of iterations to
5138              run  the benchmark. The command is executed repeatedly until the
5139              specified number of iterations has been reached.
5140
5141       -rawcsv
5142              Print results in CSV format Print results in  a  comma-separated
5143              value  (CSV)  format  which  is  easy  to  parse for plotting or
5144              importing into a spreadsheet or database.  The  values  reported
5145              are threads, iterations, user_time, and elapsed_time.
5146
5147       -stepthreads step
5148              execute a per-thread benchmark ramp
5149               Execute a per-thread benchmark ramp, incrementing the number of
5150              threads at each step by the specified value.  The maximum number
5151              of  threads  is taken from the standard OMP_NUM_THREADS environ‐
5152              ment variable.
5153

GM COMPARE

5155       compare compares two  similar  images  using  a  specified  statistical
5156       method (see -metric) and/or by writing a difference image (-file), with
5157       the altered pixels annotated using a specified method (see  -highlight-
5158       style)  and color (see -highlight-color). Reference-image is the origi‐
5159       nal image and compare-image is the (possibly)  altered  version,  which
5160       should have the same dimensions as reference-image.
5161

EXAMPLES

5163       To  compare two images using Mean Square Error (MSE) statistical analy‐
5164       sis use:
5165
5166           gm compare -metric mse original.miff compare.miff
5167
5168
5169       To create an annotated difference image use:
5170
5171           gm compare -highlight-style assign -highlight-color purple \
5172             -file diff.miff original.miff compare.miff
5173
5174

OPTIONS

5176       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5177       the  command  line  remains  in effect only for the image that follows.
5178       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5179
5180       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5181
5182
5183       -authenticate <string>
5184              decrypt image with this password
5185
5186       -colorspace <value>
5187              the type of colorspace
5188
5189       -debug <events>
5190              enable debug printout
5191
5192       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5193              add coder/decoder specific options
5194
5195       -density <width>x<height>
5196              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5197
5198       -depth <value>
5199              depth of the image
5200
5201       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5202              specifies the X server to contact
5203
5204       -endian <type>
5205              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5206
5207       -file <filename>
5208              write annotated difference image to file
5209
5210       -help  print usage instructions
5211
5212       -highlight-color <color>
5213              pixel annotation color
5214
5215       -highlight-style <style>
5216              pixel annotation style
5217
5218       -interlace <type>
5219              the type of interlacing scheme
5220
5221       -limit <type> <value>
5222              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
5223              resource limit
5224
5225       -log <string>
5226              Specify format for debug log
5227
5228       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5229
5230       -maximum-error <limit>
5231              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
5232
5233       -metric <metric>
5234              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
5235
5236       -monitor
5237              show progress indication
5238
5239       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5240              chroma subsampling factors
5241
5242       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5243              width and height of the image
5244
5245       -type <type>
5246              the image type
5247
5248       -verbose
5249              print detailed information about the image
5250
5251       -version
5252              print GraphicsMagick version string
5253
5254              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
5255              above.
5256
5257

GM COMPOSITE

5259       composite composites (combines) images to  create  new  images.   base-
5260       image  is the base image and change-image contains the changes.  ouput-
5261       image is the result, and normally has  the  same  dimensions  as  base-
5262       image.
5263
5264
5265       The  optional mask-image can be used to provide opacity information for
5266       change-image when it has none or if you want a different mask.  A  mask
5267       image  is typically grayscale and the same size as base-image. If mask-
5268       image is not grayscale, it is converted to grayscale and the  resulting
5269       intensities are used as opacity information.
5270

EXAMPLES

5272       To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch, use:
5273
5274           gm composite cockatoo.miff perch.ras composite.miff
5275
5276
5277       To compute the difference between images in a series, use:
5278
5279           gm composite -compose difference series.2 series.1
5280                     difference.miff
5281
5282
5283       To  composite  an image of a cockatoo with a perch starting at location
5284       (100,150), use:
5285
5286           gm composite -geometry +100+150 cockatoo.miff
5287                     perch.ras composite.miff
5288
5289
5290       To tile a logo across your image of a cockatoo, use
5291
5292           gm convert +shade 30x60 cockatoo.miff mask.miff
5293           gm composite -compose bumpmap -tile logo.png
5294                     cockatoo.miff mask.miff composite.miff
5295
5296
5297       To composite a red, green, and blue color plane into a single composite
5298       image, try
5299
5300           gm composite -compose CopyGreen green.png red.png
5301                     red-green.png
5302           gm composite -compose CopyBlue blue.png red-green.png
5303                     gm composite.png
5304
5305

OPTIONS

5307       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5308       the command line remains in effect only for  the  image  that  follows.
5309       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5310
5311       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5312
5313
5314       -authenticate <string>
5315              decrypt image with this password
5316
5317       -background <color>
5318              the background color
5319
5320       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5321              blue chromaticity primary point
5322
5323       -colors <value>
5324              preferred number of colors in the image
5325
5326       -colorspace <value>
5327              the type of colorspace
5328
5329       -comment <string>
5330              annotate an image with a comment
5331
5332       -compose <operator>
5333              the type of image composition
5334
5335       -compress <type>
5336              the type of image compression
5337
5338       -debug <events>
5339              enable debug printout
5340
5341       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5342              add coder/decoder specific options
5343
5344       -density <width>x<height>
5345              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5346
5347       -depth <value>
5348              depth of the image
5349
5350       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
5351              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
5352
5353       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5354              specifies the X server to contact
5355
5356       -dispose <method>
5357              GIF disposal method
5358
5359       -dissolve <percent>
5360              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
5361
5362       -dither
5363              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
5364
5365       -encoding <type>
5366              specify the text encoding
5367
5368       -endian <type>
5369              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5370
5371       -filter <type>
5372              use this type of filter when resizing an image
5373
5374       -font <name>
5375              use this font when annotating the image with text
5376
5377       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
5378              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
5379
5380       -gravity <type>
5381              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
5382
5383       -green-primary <x>,<y>
5384              green chromaticity primary point
5385
5386       -help  print usage instructions
5387
5388       -interlace <type>
5389              the type of interlacing scheme
5390
5391       -label <name>
5392              assign a label to an image
5393
5394       -limit <type> <value>
5395              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
5396              resource limit
5397
5398       -log <string>
5399              Specify format for debug log
5400
5401       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5402
5403       -monitor
5404              show progress indication
5405
5406       -monochrome
5407              transform the image to black and white
5408
5409       -negate
5410              replace every pixel with its complementary color
5411
5412       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
5413              size and location of an image canvas
5414
5415       -profile <filename>
5416              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
5417
5418       -quality <value>
5419              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
5420
5421       -recolor <matrix>
5422              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
5423
5424       -red-primary <x>,<y>
5425              red chromaticity primary point
5426
5427       -render
5428              render vector operations
5429
5430       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
5431              Adjust image page offsets
5432
5433       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5434              resize an image
5435
5436       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
5437              rotate the image
5438
5439       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5440              chroma subsampling factors
5441
5442       -scene <value>
5443              set scene number
5444
5445       -set <attribute> <value>
5446              set an image attribute
5447
5448       +set <attribute>
5449              unset an image attribute
5450
5451       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
5452              sharpen the image
5453
5454       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5455              width and height of the image
5456
5457       -stegano <offset>
5458              hide watermark within an image
5459
5460       -stereo
5461              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
5462
5463       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
5464
5465       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5466              resize an image (quickly)
5467
5468       -treedepth <value>
5469              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
5470
5471       -trim  trim an image
5472
5473       -type <type>
5474              the image type
5475
5476       -units <type>
5477              the units of image resolution
5478
5479       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
5480              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
5481
5482       -verbose
5483              print detailed information about the image
5484
5485       -version
5486              print GraphicsMagick version string
5487
5488       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
5489              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
5490
5491       -white-point <x>,<y>
5492              chromaticity white point
5493
5494       -write <filename>
5495              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
5496
5497              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
5498              above.
5499
5500

GM CONJURE

5502       The  Magick  scripting language (MSL) will primarily benefit those that
5503       want to accomplish custom image processing tasks but  do  not  wish  to
5504       program,  or  those  that do not have access to a Perl interpreter or a
5505       compiler.  The interpreter is called conjure and  here  is  an  example
5506       script:
5507
5508           <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5509           <image size="400x400" >
5510             <read filename="image.gif" />
5511             <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5512             <resize geometry="%[dimensions]" />
5513             <get width="width" height="height" />
5514             <print output=
5515               "Image sized from %[base-width]x%[base-height]
5516                to %[width]x%[height].\n" />
5517             <write filename="image.png" />
5518           </image>
5519
5520
5521       invoked with
5522
5523           gm conjure -dimensions 400x400 incantation.msl
5524
5525
5526       All operations will closely follow the key/value pairs defined in Perl‐
5527       Magick, unless otherwise noted.
5528

OPTIONS

5530       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5531       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
5532       specifying the option again with  a  different  effect,  or  if  it  is
5533       changed by a statement in the scripting language.
5534
5535       You  can  define your own keyword/value pairs on the command line.  The
5536       script can then use this information when setting values  by  including
5537       %[keyword]  in  the  string.  For example, if you included "-dimensions
5538       400x400" on the command line, as illustrated  above,  then  any  string
5539       containing   "%[dimensions]"   would  have  400x400  substituted.   The
5540       "%[string]" can be  used  either  an  entire  string,  such  as  geome‐
5541       try="%[dimensions]"  or as a part of a string such as filename="%[base‐
5542       name].png".
5543
5544       The keyword can be any string except for the following reserved strings
5545       (in any upper, lower, or mixed case variant): debug, help, and verbose,
5546       whose usage is described below.
5547
5548       The value can be any string.  If either the keyword or the  value  con‐
5549       tains  white  space  or  any symbols that have special meanings to your
5550       shell such as "#", "|", or "%", enclose the string in  quotation  marks
5551       or use "\" to escape the white space and special symbols.
5552
5553       Keywords  and values are case dependent.  "Key", "key", and "KEY" would
5554       be three different keywords.
5555
5556       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5557
5558
5559       -debug <events>
5560              enable debug printout
5561
5562       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5563              add coder/decoder specific options
5564
5565       -help  print usage instructions
5566
5567       -log <string>
5568              Specify format for debug log
5569
5570       -verbose
5571              print detailed information about the image
5572
5573       -version
5574              print GraphicsMagick version string
5575

MAGICK SCRIPTING LANGUAGE

5577       The Magick Scripting Language (MSL)  presently  defines  the  following
5578       elements and their attributes:
5579
5580               <image>
5581
5582                    background, color, id, size
5583
5584                    Define  a new image object.  </image> destroys it. Because
5585                    of this, if you wish  to  reference  multiple  "subimages"
5586                    (aka  pages  or  layers),  you can embed one image element
5587                    inside of another. For example:
5588
5589
5590
5591                        <image>
5592                        <read filename="input.png" />
5593                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5594                        <image height="base-height" width="base-width">
5595                        <image />
5596                        <write filename="output.mng" />
5597                        </image>
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602                        <image size="400x400" />
5603
5604
5605               <group>
5606
5607
5608                    Define a new group of image objects.  By  default,  images
5609                    are only valid for the life of their <image>element.
5610
5611
5612
5613                        <image>   -- creates the image
5614                        .....     -- do stuff with it
5615                        </image>  -- dispose of the image
5616
5617
5618
5619                    However,  in  a  group, all images in that group will stay
5620                    around for the life of the group:
5621
5622
5623
5624                        <group>                           -- start a group
5625                            <image>                       -- create an image
5626                            ....                          -- do stuff
5627                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5628                            <image>                        --  create  another
5629                    image
5630                            ....                          -- do more stuff
5631                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5632                            <write filename="image.mng" />  -- output
5633                        </group>                           --  dispose of both
5634                    images
5635
5636
5637               <read>
5638
5639                        filename
5640
5641                    Read a new image from a disk file.
5642
5643
5644
5645                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5646
5647
5648
5649                    To read two images use
5650
5651
5652
5653                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5654                        <read filename="image.png />
5655
5656
5657               <write>
5658
5659                        filename
5660                    Write the image(s) to disk, either as a  single  multiple-
5661                    image file or multiple ones if necessary.
5662
5663
5664
5665                         <write filename=image.tiff" />
5666
5667               <get>
5668
5669                    Get   any  attribute  recognized  by  PerlMagick's  GetAt‐
5670                    tribute() and stores it as an image  attribute  for  later
5671                    use. Currently only width and height are supported.
5672
5673
5674                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5675                        <print  output="Image  size  is  %[base-width]x%[base-
5676                    height].\n" />
5677
5678
5679               <set>
5680
5681                    background, bordercolor, clip-mask,  colorspace,  density,
5682                    magick,  mattecolor, opacity.  Set an attribute recognized
5683                    by PerlMagick's GetAttribute().
5684               <profile>
5685
5686                        [profilename]
5687
5688                    Read one or more IPTC, ICC or generic profiles  from  file
5689                    and assign to image
5690
5691
5692
5693                        <profile iptc="profile.iptc" generic="generic.dat" />
5694
5695
5696
5697                    To remove a specified profile use "!" as the filename eg
5698
5699
5700
5701                        <profile icm="!" iptc="profile.iptc" />
5702
5703
5704               <border>
5705
5706                        fill, geometry, height, width
5707               <blur>
5708
5709                        radius, sigma
5710               <charcoal>
5711
5712                        radius, sigma
5713               <chop>
5714
5715                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5716               <crop>
5717
5718                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5719               <composite>
5720
5721                        compose, geometry, gravity, image, x, y
5722
5723
5724                        <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5725                        <group>
5726                            <image id="image_01">
5727                                <read filename="cloud3.gif"/>
5728                                <resize geometry="250x90"/>
5729                            </image>
5730                            <image id="image_02">
5731                                <read filename="cloud4.gif"/>
5732                                <resize geometry="190x100"/>
5733                            </image>
5734                            <image>
5735                                <read filename="background.jpg"/>
5736                                <composite       image="image_01"       geome‐
5737                    try="+740+470"/>
5738                                <composite       image="image_02"       geome‐
5739                    try="+390+415"/>
5740                            </image>
5741                            <write filename="result.png"/>
5742                        </group>
5743
5744
5745               <despeckle>
5746
5747               <emboss>
5748
5749                        radius, sigma
5750               <enhance>
5751
5752               <equalize>
5753
5754               <edge>
5755
5756                        radius
5757               <flip>
5758
5759               <flop>
5760
5761               <frame>
5762
5763                        fill, geometry, height, width, x, y, inner, outer
5764               <flatten>
5765
5766               <get>
5767
5768                        height, width
5769               <gamma>
5770
5771                        red, green, blue
5772               <image>
5773
5774                        background, color, id, size
5775               <implode>
5776
5777                        amount
5778               <magnify>
5779
5780               <minify>
5781
5782               <medianfilter>
5783
5784                        radius
5785               <normalize>
5786
5787               <oilpaint>
5788
5789                        radius
5790               <print>
5791
5792                        output
5793               <profile>
5794
5795                        [profilename]
5796               <read>
5797
5798               <resize>
5799
5800                        blur, filter, geometry, height, width
5801               <roll>
5802
5803                        geometry, x, y
5804               <rotate>
5805
5806                        degrees
5807               <reducenoise>
5808
5809                        radius
5810               <sample>
5811
5812                        geometry, height, width
5813               <scale>
5814
5815                        geometry, height, width
5816               <sharpen>
5817
5818                        radius, sigma
5819               <shave>
5820
5821                        geometry, height, width
5822               <shear>
5823
5824                        x, y
5825               <solarize>
5826
5827                        threshold
5828               <spread>
5829
5830                        radius
5831               <stegano>
5832
5833                        image
5834               <stereo>
5835
5836                        image
5837               <swirl>
5838
5839                        degrees
5840               <texture>
5841
5842                        image
5843               <threshold>
5844
5845                        threshold
5846               <transparent>
5847
5848                        color
5849               <trim>
5850
5851
5852

GM CONVERT

5854       Convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
5855       with a differing image format. In addition, various types of image pro‐
5856       cessing  can  be performed on the converted image during the conversion
5857       process. Convert recognizes the image formats  listed  in  GraphicsMag‐
5858       ick(1).
5859
5860

EXAMPLES

5862       To make a thumbnail of a JPEG image, use:
5863
5864           gm convert -size 120x120 cockatoo.jpg -resize 120x120
5865                   +profile "*" thumbnail.jpg
5866
5867
5868       In  this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder that
5869       the image is going to be downscaled to  120x120,  allowing  it  to  run
5870       faster  by  avoiding returning full-resolution images to GraphicsMagick
5871       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
5872       the  desired  dimensions of the output image.  It will be scaled so its
5873       largest dimension is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes  any  ICM,
5874       EXIF,  IPTC,  or  other profiles that might be present in the input and
5875       aren't needed in the thumbnail.
5876
5877       To convert a MIFF image of a cockatoo to a SUN raster image, use:
5878
5879           gm convert cockatoo.miff sun:cockatoo.ras
5880
5881
5882       To convert a multi-page PostScript document to  individual  FAX  pages,
5883       use:
5884
5885           gm convert -monochrome document.ps fax:page
5886
5887
5888       To  convert  a TIFF image to a PostScript A4 page with the image in the
5889       lower left-hand corner, use:
5890
5891           gm convert -page A4+0+0 image.tiff document.ps
5892
5893
5894       To convert a raw Gray image with  a  128  byte  header  to  a  portable
5895       graymap, use:
5896
5897           gm convert -depth 8 -size 768x512+128 gray:raw
5898                   image.pgm
5899
5900
5901       In  this example, "raw" is the input file.  Its format is "gray" and it
5902       has the dimensions and number of header bytes specified  by  the  -size
5903       option and the sample depth specified by the -depth option.  The output
5904       file is "image.pgm".  The suffix ".pgm" specifies its format.
5905
5906       To convert a Photo CD image to a TIFF image, use:
5907
5908           gm convert -size 1536x1024 img0009.pcd image.tiff
5909           gm convert img0009.pcd[4] image.tiff
5910
5911
5912       To create a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
5913
5914           gm convert 'vid:*.jpg' directory.miff
5915
5916
5917       To annotate an image with  blue  text  using  font  12x24  at  position
5918       (100,100), use:
5919
5920           gm convert -font helvetica -fill blue
5921                   -draw "text 100,100 Cockatoo"
5922                   bird.jpg bird.miff
5923
5924
5925       To tile a 640x480 image with a JPEG texture with bumps use:
5926
5927           gm convert -size 640x480 tile:bumps.jpg tiled.png
5928
5929
5930       To  surround  an  icon with an ornamental border to use with Mosaic(1),
5931       use:
5932
5933           gm convert -mattecolor "#697B8F" -frame 6x6 bird.jpg
5934                   icon.png
5935
5936
5937       To create a MNG animation from a DNA molecule sequence, use:
5938
5939           gm convert -delay 20 dna.* dna.mng
5940
5941

OPTIONS

5943       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5944       the  command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
5945       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option  or  -noop.
5946       Some  options  only  affect  the decoding of images and others only the
5947       encoding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
5948
5949       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5950
5951
5952       -adjoin
5953              join images into a single multi-image file
5954
5955       -affine <matrix>
5956              drawing transform matrix
5957
5958       -antialias
5959              remove pixel aliasing
5960
5961       -append
5962              append a set of images
5963
5964        -asc-cdl <spec>
5965              apply ASC CDL color transform
5966
5967       -authenticate <string>
5968              decrypt image with this password
5969
5970       -auto-orient
5971              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5972
5973       -average
5974              average a set of images
5975
5976       -background <color>
5977              the background color
5978
5979       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
5980              pixels below the threshold become black
5981
5982       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5983              blue chromaticity primary point
5984
5985       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
5986              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
5987
5988       -border <width>x<height>
5989              surround the image with a border of color
5990
5991       -bordercolor <color>
5992              the border color
5993
5994       -box <color>
5995              set the color of the annotation bounding box
5996
5997       -channel <type>
5998              the type of channel
5999
6000       -charcoal <factor>
6001              simulate a charcoal drawing
6002
6003       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6004              remove pixels from the interior of an image
6005
6006       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
6007
6008       -coalesce
6009              merge a sequence of images
6010
6011       -colorize <value>
6012              colorize the image with the pen color
6013
6014       -colors <value>
6015              preferred number of colors in the image
6016
6017       -colorspace <value>
6018              the type of colorspace
6019
6020       -comment <string>
6021              annotate an image with a comment
6022
6023       -compose <operator>
6024              the type of image composition
6025
6026       -compress <type>
6027              the type of image compression
6028
6029       -contrast
6030              enhance or reduce the image contrast
6031
6032       -convolve <kernel>
6033              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
6034
6035       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6036              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6037
6038       -cycle <amount>
6039              displace image colormap by amount
6040
6041       -debug <events>
6042              enable debug printout
6043
6044       -deconstruct
6045              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
6046
6047       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6048              add coder/decoder specific options
6049
6050       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6051              display the next image after pausing
6052
6053       -density <width>x<height>
6054              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6055
6056       -depth <value>
6057              depth of the image
6058
6059       -despeckle
6060              reduce the speckles within an image
6061
6062       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6063              specifies the X server to contact
6064
6065       -dispose <method>
6066              GIF disposal method
6067
6068       -dither
6069              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6070
6071       -draw <string>
6072              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
6073
6074       -edge <radius>
6075              detect edges within an image
6076
6077       -emboss <radius>
6078              emboss an image
6079
6080       -encoding <type>
6081              specify the text encoding
6082
6083       -endian <type>
6084              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6085
6086       -enhance
6087              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6088
6089       -equalize
6090              perform histogram equalization to the image
6091
6092       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6093              composite image on background color canvas image
6094
6095       -fill <color>
6096              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
6097
6098       -filter <type>
6099              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6100
6101       -flatten
6102              flatten a sequence of images
6103
6104       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6105
6106       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6107
6108       -font <name>
6109              use this font when annotating the image with text
6110
6111       -format <string>
6112              output formatted image characteristics
6113
6114       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6115              surround the image with an ornamental border
6116
6117       -fuzz <distance>{%}
6118              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
6119
6120       -gamma <value>
6121              level of gamma correction
6122
6123       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
6124              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
6125
6126       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6127              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6128
6129       -gravity <type>
6130              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
6131
6132       -green-primary <x>,<y>
6133              green chromaticity primary point
6134
6135       -hald-clut <clut>
6136              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
6137
6138       -help  print usage instructions
6139
6140       -implode <factor>
6141              implode image pixels about the center
6142
6143       -intent <type>
6144              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
6145
6146       -interlace <type>
6147              the type of interlacing scheme
6148
6149       -label <name>
6150              assign a label to an image
6151
6152       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
6153              perform local adaptive thresholding
6154
6155       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
6156              adjust the level of image contrast
6157
6158       -limit <type> <value>
6159              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
6160              resource limit
6161
6162       -list <type>
6163              the type of list
6164
6165       -log <string>
6166              Specify format for debug log
6167
6168       -loop <iterations>
6169              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
6170
6171       -magnify
6172              magnify the image
6173
6174       -map <filename>
6175              choose a particular set of colors from this image
6176
6177       -mask <filename>
6178              Specify a clipping mask
6179
6180       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6181
6182       -mattecolor <color>
6183              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6184
6185       -median <radius>
6186              apply a median filter to the image
6187
6188       -minify <factor>
6189              minify the image
6190
6191       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
6192              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
6193
6194       -monitor
6195              show progress indication
6196
6197       -monochrome
6198              transform the image to black and white
6199
6200       -morph <frames>
6201              morphs an image sequence
6202
6203       -mosaic
6204              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
6205
6206       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
6207              Simulate motion blur
6208
6209       -negate
6210              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6211
6212       -noise <radius|type>
6213              add or reduce noise in an image
6214
6215       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6216
6217       -normalize
6218              transform image to span the full range of color values
6219
6220       -opaque <color>
6221              change this color to the pen color within the image
6222
6223       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
6224              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
6225              channel
6226
6227       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
6228              ordered dither the image
6229
6230       -orient <orientation>
6231              Set the image orientation attribute
6232
6233       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6234              size and location of an image canvas
6235
6236       -paint <radius>
6237              simulate an oil painting
6238
6239       -pen <color>
6240              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
6241
6242       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
6243
6244       -pointsize <value>
6245              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
6246
6247       -preview <type>
6248              image preview type
6249
6250       -process <command>
6251              process a sequence of images using a process module
6252
6253       -profile <filename>
6254              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
6255
6256       -quality <value>
6257              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6258
6259       -raise <width>x<height>
6260              lighten or darken image edges
6261
6262       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
6263              random threshold the image
6264
6265       -recolor <matrix>
6266              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
6267
6268       -red-primary <x>,<y>
6269              red chromaticity primary point
6270
6271       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6272              apply options to a portion of the image
6273
6274       -render
6275              render vector operations
6276
6277       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
6278              Adjust image page offsets
6279
6280       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
6281              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
6282
6283       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6284              resize an image
6285
6286       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6287              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6288
6289       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6290              rotate the image
6291
6292       -sample <geometry>
6293              scale image using pixel sampling
6294
6295       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6296              chroma subsampling factors
6297
6298       -scale <geometry>
6299              scale the image.
6300
6301       -scene <value>
6302              set scene number
6303
6304       -set <attribute> <value>
6305              set an image attribute
6306
6307       +set <attribute>
6308              unset an image attribute
6309
6310       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6311              segment an image
6312
6313       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
6314              shade the image using a distant light source
6315
6316       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6317              sharpen the image
6318
6319       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
6320              shave pixels from the image edges
6321
6322       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
6323              shear the image along the X or Y axis
6324
6325       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6326              width and height of the image
6327
6328       -solarize <factor>
6329              negate all pixels above the threshold level
6330
6331       -spread <amount>
6332              displace image pixels by a random amount
6333
6334       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
6335
6336       -stroke <color>
6337              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
6338
6339       -strokewidth <value>
6340              set the stroke width
6341
6342       -swirl <degrees>
6343              swirl image pixels about the center
6344
6345       -texture <filename>
6346              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6347
6348       -threshold <value>{%}
6349              threshold the image
6350
6351       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6352              resize an image (quickly)
6353
6354       -tile <filename>
6355              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
6356
6357       -transform
6358              transform the image
6359
6360       -transparent <color>
6361              make this color transparent within the image
6362
6363       -treedepth <value>
6364              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6365
6366       -trim  trim an image
6367
6368       -type <type>
6369              the image type
6370
6371       -units <type>
6372              the units of image resolution
6373
6374       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
6375              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
6376
6377       -use-pixmap
6378              use the pixmap
6379
6380       -verbose
6381              print detailed information about the image
6382
6383       -version
6384              print GraphicsMagick version string
6385
6386       -view <string>
6387              FlashPix viewing parameters
6388
6389       -virtual-pixel <method>
6390              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
6391
6392       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
6393              alter an image along a sine wave
6394
6395       -white-point <x>,<y>
6396              chromaticity white point
6397
6398       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
6399              pixels above the threshold become white
6400
6401       -write <filename>
6402              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
6403
6404              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
6405              above.
6406

GM DISPLAY

6408       Display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
6409       play program. It can display an image on any workstation screen running
6410       an  X server. Display can read and write many of the more popular image
6411       formats (e.g. JPEG, TIFF, PNM, Photo CD, etc.).
6412
6413       With display, you can perform these functions on an image:
6414
6415                o  load an image from a file
6416                o  display the next image
6417                o  display the former image
6418                o  display a sequence of images as a slide show
6419                o  write the image to a file
6420                o  print the image to a PostScript printer
6421                o  delete the image file
6422                o  create a Visual Image Directory
6423                o  select the image to display by its  thumbnail  rather  than
6424               name
6425                o  undo last image transformation
6426                o  copy a region of the image
6427                o  paste a region to the image
6428                o  restore the image to its original size
6429                o  refresh the image
6430                o  half the image size
6431                o  double the image size
6432                o  resize the image
6433                o  crop the image
6434                o  cut the image
6435                o  flop image in the horizontal direction
6436                o  flip image in the vertical direction
6437                o  rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise
6438                o  rotate the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise
6439                o  rotate the image
6440                o  shear the image
6441                o  roll the image
6442                o  trim the image edges
6443                o  invert the colors of the image
6444                o  vary the color brightness
6445                o  vary the color saturation
6446                o  vary the image hue
6447                o  gamma correct the image
6448                o  sharpen the image contrast
6449                o  dull the image contrast
6450                o  perform histogram equalization on the image
6451                o  perform histogram normalization on the image
6452                o  negate the image colors
6453                o  convert the image to grayscale
6454                o  set the maximum number of unique colors in the image
6455                o  reduce the speckles within an image
6456                o  eliminate peak noise from an image
6457                o  detect edges within the image
6458                o  emboss an image
6459                o  segment the image by color
6460                o  simulate an oil painting
6461                o  simulate a charcoal drawing
6462                o  annotate the image with text
6463                o  draw on the image
6464                o  edit an image pixel color
6465                o  edit the image matte information
6466                o  composite an image with another
6467                o  add a border to the image
6468                o  surround image with an ornamental border
6469                o  apply image processing techniques to a region of interest
6470                o  display information about the image
6471                o  zoom a portion of the image
6472                o  show a histogram of the image
6473                o  display image to background of a window
6474                o  set user preferences
6475                o  display information about this program
6476                o  discard all images and exit program
6477                o  change the level of magnification
6478                o   display images specified by a World Wide Web (WWW) uniform
6479               resource locator (URL)
6480
6481

EXAMPLES

6483       To scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and  480
6484       pixels in height and position the window at location (200,200), use:
6485
6486           gm display -geometry 640x480+200+200! cockatoo.miff
6487
6488
6489       To  display an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a back‐
6490       drop, use:
6491
6492           gm display +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.miff
6493
6494
6495       To tile a slate texture onto the root window, use:
6496
6497           gm display -size 1280x1024 -window root slate.png
6498
6499
6500       To display a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
6501
6502           gm display 'vid:*.jpg'
6503
6504
6505       To display a MAP image that is 640 pixels in width and  480  pixels  in
6506       height with 256 colors, use:
6507
6508           gm display -size 640x480+256 cockatoo.map
6509
6510
6511       To display an image of a cockatoo specified with a World Wide Web (WWW)
6512       uniform resource locator (URL), use:
6513
6514           gm display ftp://wizards.dupont.com/images/cockatoo.jpg
6515
6516
6517       To display histogram of an image, use:
6518
6519           gm gm convert file.jpg HISTOGRAM:- | gm display -
6520
6521

OPTIONS

6523       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
6524       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
6525       specifying the option again with a different  effect.  For  example  to
6526       display  three  images,  the  first  with 32 colors, the second with an
6527       unlimited number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
6528
6529           gm display -colors 32 cockatoo.miff -noop duck.miff
6530                        -colors 16 macaw.miff
6531
6532
6533       Display options can appear on the command line or in your  X  resources
6534       file.  See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values specified
6535       in your X resources file.
6536
6537       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
6538
6539
6540       -authenticate <string>
6541              decrypt image with this password
6542
6543       -backdrop
6544              display the image centered on a backdrop.
6545
6546       -background <color>
6547              the background color
6548
6549       -border <width>x<height>
6550              surround the image with a border of color
6551
6552       -bordercolor <color>
6553              the border color
6554
6555       -borderwidth <geometry>
6556              the border width
6557
6558       -colormap <type>
6559              define the colormap type
6560
6561       -colors <value>
6562              preferred number of colors in the image
6563
6564       -colorspace <value>
6565              the type of colorspace
6566
6567       -comment <string>
6568              annotate an image with a comment
6569
6570       -compress <type>
6571              the type of image compression
6572
6573       -contrast
6574              enhance or reduce the image contrast
6575
6576       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6577              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6578
6579       -debug <events>
6580              enable debug printout
6581
6582       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6583              add coder/decoder specific options
6584
6585       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6586              display the next image after pausing
6587
6588       -density <width>x<height>
6589              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6590
6591       -depth <value>
6592              depth of the image
6593
6594       -despeckle
6595              reduce the speckles within an image
6596
6597       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6598              specifies the X server to contact
6599
6600       -dispose <method>
6601              GIF disposal method
6602
6603       -dither
6604              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6605
6606       -edge <radius>
6607              detect edges within an image
6608
6609       -endian <type>
6610              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6611
6612       -enhance
6613              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6614
6615       -filter <type>
6616              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6617
6618       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6619
6620       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6621
6622       -font <name>
6623              use this font when annotating the image with text
6624
6625       -foreground <color>
6626              define the foreground color
6627
6628       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6629              surround the image with an ornamental border
6630
6631       -gamma <value>
6632              level of gamma correction
6633
6634       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6635              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6636
6637       -help  print usage instructions
6638
6639       -iconGeometry <geometry>
6640              specify the icon geometry
6641
6642       -iconic
6643              iconic animation
6644
6645       -immutable
6646              make image immutable
6647
6648       -interlace <type>
6649              the type of interlacing scheme
6650
6651       -label <name>
6652              assign a label to an image
6653
6654       -limit <type> <value>
6655              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
6656              resource limit
6657
6658       -log <string>
6659              Specify format for debug log
6660
6661       -magnify <factor>
6662              magnify the image
6663
6664       -map <type>
6665              display image using this type.
6666
6667       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6668
6669       -mattecolor <color>
6670              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6671
6672       -monitor
6673              show progress indication
6674
6675       -monochrome
6676              transform the image to black and white
6677
6678       -name  name an image
6679
6680       -negate
6681              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6682
6683       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6684
6685       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6686              size and location of an image canvas
6687
6688       +progress
6689              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
6690
6691       -quality <value>
6692              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6693
6694       -raise <width>x<height>
6695              lighten or darken image edges
6696
6697       -remote
6698              perform a X11 remote operation
6699
6700       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6701              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6702
6703       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6704              rotate the image
6705
6706       -sample <geometry>
6707              scale image using pixel sampling
6708
6709       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6710              chroma subsampling factors
6711
6712       -scenes <value-value>
6713              range of image scene numbers to read
6714
6715       -set <attribute> <value>
6716              set an image attribute
6717
6718       +set <attribute>
6719              unset an image attribute
6720
6721       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6722              segment an image
6723
6724       -shared-memory
6725              use shared memory
6726
6727       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6728              sharpen the image
6729
6730       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6731              width and height of the image
6732
6733       -text-font <name>
6734              font for writing fixed-width text
6735
6736       -texture <filename>
6737              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6738
6739       -title <string>
6740              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
6741
6742       -treedepth <value>
6743              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6744
6745       -trim  trim an image
6746
6747       -type <type>
6748              the image type
6749
6750       -update <seconds>
6751               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
6752
6753       -use-pixmap
6754              use the pixmap
6755
6756       -verbose
6757              print detailed information about the image
6758
6759       -version
6760              print GraphicsMagick version string
6761
6762       -visual <type>
6763              animate images using this X visual type
6764
6765       -window <id>
6766              make image the background of a window
6767
6768       -window-group
6769              specify the window group
6770
6771       -write <filename>
6772              write the image to a file [display]
6773
6774              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
6775              above.
6776
6777

MOUSE BUTTONS

6779       The effects of each button press is described below. Three buttons  are
6780       required.  If you have a two button mouse, button 1 and 3 are returned.
6781       Press ALT and button 3 to simulate button 2.
6782
6783       1       Press this button to map or unmap the Command widget . See  the
6784              next section for more information about the Command widget.
6785
6786       2       Press and drag to define a region of the image to magnify.
6787
6788       3        Press  and drag to choose from a select set of display(1) com‐
6789              mands. This button behaves differently if the image  being  dis‐
6790              played  is a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of
6791              the directory and press this button and drag to select a command
6792              from a pop-up menu.  Choose from these menu items:
6793
6794                  Open
6795                  Next
6796                  Former
6797                  Delete
6798                  Update
6799
6800
6801              If  you  choose  Open, the image represented by the tile is dis‐
6802              played.  To return to the visual image  directory,  choose  Next
6803              from  the  Command  widget  (refer to Command Widget).  Next and
6804              Former moves to the next or former  image  respectively.  Choose
6805              Delete to delete a particular image tile. Finally, choose Update
6806              to synchronize all the image tiles with their respective images.
6807              See montage and miff for more details.
6808

COMMAND WIDGET

6810       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
6811
6812           File
6813
6814           Open...
6815           Next
6816           Former
6817           Select...
6818           Save...
6819           Print...
6820           Delete...
6821           Canvas...
6822           Visual Directory...
6823           Quit
6824
6825
6826
6827           Edit
6828
6829           Undo
6830           Redo
6831           Cut
6832           Copy
6833           Paste
6834
6835
6836
6837           View
6838
6839           Half Size
6840           Original Size
6841           Double Size
6842           Resize...
6843           Apply
6844           Refresh
6845           Restore
6846
6847
6848
6849           Transform
6850
6851           Crop
6852           Chop
6853           Flop
6854           Flip
6855           Rotate Right
6856           Rotate Left
6857           Rotate...
6858           Shear...
6859           Roll...
6860           Trim Edges
6861
6862
6863
6864           Enhance
6865
6866           Hue...
6867           Saturation...
6868           Brightness...
6869           Gamma...
6870           Spiff...
6871           Dull
6872           Equalize
6873           Normalize
6874           Negate
6875           GRAYscale
6876           Quantize...
6877
6878
6879
6880           Effects
6881
6882           Despeckle
6883           Emboss
6884           Reduce Noise
6885           Add Noise
6886           Sharpen...
6887           Blur...
6888           Threshold...
6889           Edge Detect...
6890           Spread...
6891           Shade...
6892           Raise...
6893           Segment...
6894
6895
6896
6897           F/X
6898
6899           Solarize...
6900           Swirl...
6901           Implode...
6902           Wave...
6903           Oil Paint...
6904           Charcoal Draw...
6905
6906
6907
6908           Image Edit
6909
6910           Annotate...
6911           Draw...
6912           Color...
6913           Matte...
6914           Composite...
6915           Add Border...
6916           Add Frame...
6917           Comment...
6918           Launch...
6919           Region of Interest...
6920
6921
6922
6923           Miscellany
6924
6925           Image Info
6926           Zoom Image
6927           Show Preview...
6928           Show Histogram
6929           Show Matte
6930           Background...
6931           Slide Show
6932           Preferences...
6933
6934
6935
6936           Help
6937
6938           Overview
6939           Browse Documentation
6940           About Display
6941
6942
6943
6944       Menu  items  with  a indented triangle have a sub-menu. They are repre‐
6945       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
6946       pointer  to  the appropriate menu and press button 1 and drag. When you
6947       find the desired sub-menu item, release the button and the  command  is
6948       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
6949       execute a particular command.
6950

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

6952       Accelerators are one or two key presses that effect a  particular  com‐
6953       mand.  The keyboard accelerators that display understands is:
6954
6955           Ctl+O     Press to load an image from a file.
6956           space     Press to display the next image.
6957
6958
6959       If  the  image is a multi-paged document such as a PostScript document,
6960       you can skip ahead several pages by preceding this command with a  num‐
6961       ber.   For  example to display the fourth page beyond the current page,
6962       press 4space.
6963
6964           backspace Press to display the former image.
6965
6966
6967       If the image is a multi-paged document such as a  PostScript  document,
6968       you can skip behind several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6969       ber.  For example to display the  fourth  page  preceding  the  current
6970       page, press 4n.
6971
6972           Ctl-S    Press to save the image to a file.
6973           Ctl-P    Press to print the image to a
6974                    PostScript printer.
6975           Ctl-D    Press to delete an image file.
6976           Ctl-N    Press to create a blank canvas.
6977           Ctl-Q    Press to discard all images and exit program.
6978           Ctl+Z    Press to undo last image transformation.
6979           Ctl+R    Press to redo last image transformation.
6980           Ctl-X    Press to cut a region of
6981                    the image.
6982           Ctl-C    Press to copy a region of
6983                    the image.
6984           Ctl-V    Press to paste a region to
6985                    the image.
6986           <        Press to halve the image size.
6987           .        Press to return to the original image size.
6988           >        Press to double the image size.
6989           %        Press to resize the image to a width and height
6990                    you specify.
6991           Cmd-A    Press to make any image transformations
6992                    permanent.
6993                    By default, any image size transformations are
6994                    applied to the original image to create the
6995                    image displayed on the X server.  However, the
6996                    transformations are not permanent (i.e. the
6997                    original image does not change size only the
6998                    X image does). For example, if you press ">"
6999                    the X image will appear to double in size, but
7000                    the original image will in fact remain the same
7001                    size.  To force the original image to double in
7002                    size, press ">" followed by "Cmd-A".
7003           @        Press to refresh the image window.
7004           C        Press to crop the image.
7005           [        Press to chop the image.
7006           H        Press to flop image in the horizontal direction.
7007           V        Press to flip image in the vertical direction.
7008           /        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
7009           \        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees
7010                    counter-clockwise.
7011           *        Press to rotate the image
7012                    the number of degrees you specify.
7013           S        Press to shear the image the number of degrees
7014                    you specify.
7015           R        Press to roll the image.
7016           T        Press to trim the image edges.
7017           Shft-H   Press to vary the color hue.
7018           Shft-S   Press to vary the color saturation.
7019           Shft-L   Press to vary the image brightness.
7020           Shft-G   Press to gamma correct the image.
7021           Shft-C   Press to spiff up the image contrast.
7022           Shft-Z   Press to dull the image contrast.
7023           =        Press to perform histogram equalization on
7024                    the image.
7025           Shft-N   Press to perform histogram normalization on
7026                    the image.
7027           Shft-~   Press to negate the colors of the image.
7028           .        Press to convert the image colors to gray.
7029           Shft-#   Press to set the maximum number of unique
7030                    colors in the image.
7031           F2       Press to reduce the speckles in an image.
7032           F2       Press to emboss an image.
7033           F4       Press to eliminate peak noise from an image.
7034           F5       Press to add noise to an image.
7035           F6       Press to sharpen an image.
7036           F7       Press to blur image an image.
7037           F8       Press to threshold the image.
7038           F9       Press to detect edges within an image.
7039           F10      Press to displace pixels by a random amount.
7040           F11      Press to shade the image using a distant light
7041                    source.
7042           F12      Press to lighten or darken image edges to
7043                    create a 3-D effect.
7044           F13      Press to segment the image by color.
7045           Meta-S   Press to swirl image pixels about the center.
7046           Meta-I   Press to implode image pixels about the center.
7047           Meta-W   Press to alter an image along a sine wave.
7048           Meta-P   Press to simulate an oil painting.
7049           Meta-C   Press to simulate a charcoal drawing.
7050           Alt-X    Press to composite the image
7051                    with another.
7052           Alt-A    Press to annotate the image with text.
7053           Alt-D    Press to draw a line on the image.
7054           Alt-P    Press to edit an image pixel color.
7055           Alt-M    Press to edit the image matte information.
7056           Alt-X    Press to composite the image with another.
7057           Alt-A    Press to add a border to the image.
7058           Alt-F    Press to add a ornamental frame to the image.
7059           Alt-Shft-!   Press to add an image comment.
7060           Ctl-A    Press to apply image processing techniques to a
7061                    region of interest.
7062           Shft-?   Press to display information about the image.
7063           Shft-+   Press to map the zoom image window.
7064           Shft-P   Press to preview an image enhancement, effect,
7065                    or f/x.
7066           F1       Press to display helpful information about
7067                    the "display" utility.
7068           Find     Press to browse documentation about
7069                    GraphicsMagick.
7070           1-9      Press to change the level of magnification.
7071
7072
7073       Use the arrow keys to move the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
7074       within the magnify window. Be sure to first map the magnify  window  by
7075       pressing button 2.
7076
7077       Press ALT and one of the arrow keys to trim off one pixel from any side
7078       of the image.
7079

X RESOURCES

7081       Display options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
7082       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
7083       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
7084
7085       Most display options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, dis‐
7086       play uses the following X resources:
7087
7088       background (class Background)
7089               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window back‐
7090              ground. The default is #ccc.
7091
7092       borderColor (class BorderColor)
7093               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window  bor‐
7094              der. The default is #ccc.
7095
7096       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
7097                Specifies  the width in pixels of the image window border. The
7098              default is 2.
7099
7100       browseCommand (class browseCommand)
7101               Specifies the name of the  preferred  browser  when  displaying
7102              GraphicsMagick documentation. The default is netscape %s.
7103
7104       confirmExit (class ConfirmExit)
7105                Display  pops  up  a dialog box to confirm exiting the program
7106              when exiting the program. Set this resource  to  False  to  exit
7107              without a confirmation.
7108
7109       displayGamma (class DisplayGamma)
7110                Specifies  the  gamma of the X server.  You can apply separate
7111              gamma values to the red, green, and blue channels of  the  image
7112              with   a   gamma   value  list  delineated  with  slashes  (i.e.
7113              1.7/2.3/1.2).  The default is 2.2.
7114
7115       displayWarnings (class DisplayWarnings)
7116               Display pops up a dialog box whenever a warning message occurs.
7117              Set this resource to False to ignore warning messages.
7118
7119       font (class FontList)
7120                Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in normal for‐
7121              matted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
7122
7123       font[1-9] (class Font[1-9])
7124               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when annotating
7125              the  image  window with text. The default fonts are fixed, vari‐
7126              able, 5x8, 6x10, 7x13bold, 8x13bold, 9x15bold, 10x20, and 12x24.
7127
7128       foreground (class Foreground)
7129               Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the  image
7130              window.  The default is black.
7131
7132       gammaCorrect (class gammaCorrect)
7133                This  resource,  if  true,  will lighten or darken an image of
7134              known gamma to match the gamma of the display (see resource dis‐
7135              playGamma). The default is True.
7136
7137       geometry (class Geometry)
7138                Specifies the preferred size and position of the image window.
7139              It is not necessarily obeyed by all window managers.
7140
7141              Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.   A  negative  x
7142              offset  is  measured  from  the  right edge of the screen to the
7143              right edge of the icon, and a negative y offset is measured from
7144              the bottom edge of the screen to the bottom edge of the icon.
7145
7146       iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
7147                Specifies  the  preferred size and position of the application
7148              when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
7149              agers.
7150
7151              Offsets,  if present, are handled in the same manner as in class
7152              Geometry.
7153
7154       iconic (class Iconic)
7155               This resource indicates that you would prefer that the applica‐
7156              tion's windows initially not be visible as if the windows had be
7157              immediately iconified by you. Window managers may choose not  to
7158              honor the application's request.
7159
7160       magnify (class Magnify)
7161                specifies  an  integral  factor  by  which the image should be
7162              enlarged. The default is 3.  This value only affects the  magni‐
7163              fication  window which is invoked with button number 3 after the
7164              image is displayed.
7165
7166       matteColor (class MatteColor)
7167               Specify the color of windows. It is used for the backgrounds of
7168              windows,  menus,  and  notices. A 3D effect is achieved by using
7169              highlight and shadow colors derived  from  this  color.  Default
7170              value: #697B8F.
7171
7172       name (class Name)
7173                This resource specifies the name under which resources for the
7174              application should be found. This resource is  useful  in  shell
7175              aliases  to  distinguish  between invocations of an application,
7176              without resorting to creating links to alter the executable file
7177              name. The default is the application name.
7178
7179       pen[1-9] (class Pen[1-9])
7180                Specifies the color of the preferred font to use when annotat‐
7181              ing the image window with text. The default  colors  are  black,
7182              blue, green, cyan, gray, red, magenta, yellow, and white.
7183
7184       printCommand (class PrintCommand)
7185               This command is executed whenever Print is issued.  In general,
7186              it is the command to print PostScript to your  printer.  Default
7187              value: lp -c -s %i.
7188
7189       sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
7190                This  resource  specifies  whether  display should attempt use
7191              shared memory for pixmaps. GraphicsMagick must be compiled  with
7192              shared  memory support, and the display must support the MIT-SHM
7193              extension. Otherwise, this resource is ignored. The  default  is
7194              True.
7195
7196       textFont (class textFont)
7197               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
7198              writer style) formatted text. The default is 14 point Courier.
7199
7200       title (class Title)
7201               This resource specifies the title to be used for the image win‐
7202              dow.  This  information is sometimes used by a window manager to
7203              provide a header identifying the  window.  The  default  is  the
7204              image file name.
7205
7206       undoCache (class UndoCache)
7207               Specifies, in mega-bytes, the amount of memory in the undo edit
7208              cache.  Each time you modify the image it is saved in  the  undo
7209              edit  cache as long as memory is available. You can subsequently
7210              undo one or more of these transformations.  The  default  is  16
7211              Megabytes.
7212
7213       usePixmap (class UsePixmap)
7214               Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this resource
7215              to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This option is  use‐
7216              ful  if  your image exceeds the dimensions of your server screen
7217              and you intend to pan the image. Panning  is  much  faster  with
7218              Pixmaps  than  with  a XImage. Pixmaps are considered a precious
7219              resource, use them with discretion.
7220
7221              To set the geometry of the Magnify or Pan  or  window,  use  the
7222              geometry  resource.  For example, to set the Pan window geometry
7223              to 256x256, use:
7224
7225                  gm display.pan.geometry: 256x256
7226
7227

IMAGE LOADING

7229       To select an image to display, choose Open of the  File  sub-menu  from
7230       the  Command widget. A file browser is displayed.  To choose a particu‐
7231       lar image file, move the pointer to the filename and press any  button.
7232       The  filename  is  copied to the text window. Next, press Open or press
7233       the RETURN key.  Alternatively,  you  can  type  the  image  file  name
7234       directly  into the text window. To descend directories, choose a direc‐
7235       tory name and press the button twice  quickly.  A  scrollbar  allows  a
7236       large  list  of  filenames  to  be moved through the viewing area if it
7237       exceeds the size of the list area.
7238
7239       You can trim the list of file names by using shell globbing characters.
7240       For example, type *.jpg to list only files that end with .jpg.
7241
7242       To  select  your image from the X server screen instead of from a file,
7243       Choose Grab of the Open widget.
7244

VISUAL IMAGE DIRECTORY

7246       To create a Visual Image Directory, choose Visual Directory of the File
7247       sub-menu from the Command widget . A file browser is displayed. To cre‐
7248       ate a Visual Image Directory from all the images in the current  direc‐
7249       tory,  press Directory or press the RETURN key.  Alternatively, you can
7250       select a set of image names by using  shell  globbing  characters.  For
7251       example,  type  *.jpg  to  include  only  files  that end with .jpg. To
7252       descend directories, choose a directory name and press the button twice
7253       quickly.  A  scrollbar  allows  a  large  list of filenames to be moved
7254       through the viewing area if it exceeds the size of the list area.
7255
7256       After you select a set of files, they are turned  into  thumbnails  and
7257       tiled  onto a single image. Now move the pointer to a particular thumb‐
7258       nail and press button 3 and drag. Finally, select Open. The image  rep‐
7259       resented  by  the  thumbnail is displayed at its full size. Choose Next
7260       from the File sub-menu of the Command widget to return  to  the  Visual
7261       Image Directory.
7262

IMAGE CUTTING

7264       Note  that  cut  information  for image window is not retained for col‐
7265       ormapped X server visuals (e.g.  StaticColor,  StaticColor,  GRAYScale,
7266       PseudoColor).   Correct  cutting  behavior  may  require a TrueColor or
7267       DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7268
7269       To begin, press choose Cut of the Edit sub-menu from the  Command  wid‐
7270       get. Alternatively, press F3 in the image window.
7271
7272       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7273       window. You are now in cut mode. In cut mode, the  Command  widget  has
7274       these options:
7275
7276           Help
7277           Dismiss
7278
7279
7280       To  define  a  cut  region,  press button 1 and drag. The cut region is
7281       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7282       lows  the  pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cut region, release
7283       the button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the  Command
7284       widget has these options:
7285
7286           Cut
7287           Help
7288           Dismiss
7289
7290
7291       You  can  make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cut rec‐
7292       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Cut  to
7293       commit  your copy region. To exit without cutting the image, press Dis‐
7294       miss.
7295

IMAGE COPYING

7297       To begin, press choose Copy of the Edit sub-menu from the Command  wid‐
7298       get. Alternatively, press F4 in the image window.
7299
7300       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7301       window. You are now in copy mode. In copy mode, the Command widget  has
7302       these options:
7303
7304           Help
7305           Dismiss
7306
7307
7308       To  define  a  copy region, press button 1 and drag. The copy region is
7309       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7310       lows  the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the copy region, release
7311       the button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the  Command
7312       widget has these options:
7313
7314           Copy
7315           Help
7316           Dismiss
7317
7318
7319       You  can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the copy rec‐
7320       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Copy to
7321       commit  your copy region. To exit without copying the image, press Dis‐
7322       miss.
7323

IMAGE PASTING

7325       To begin, press choose Paste of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7326       get. Alternatively, press F5 in the image window.
7327
7328       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7329       window. You are now in Paste mode. To exit immediately, press  Dismiss.
7330       In Paste mode, the Command widget has these options:
7331
7332           Operators
7333
7334           over
7335           in
7336           out
7337           atop
7338           xor
7339           plus
7340           minus
7341           add
7342           subtract
7343           difference
7344           multiply
7345           bumpmap
7346           replace
7347
7348           Help
7349           Dismiss
7350
7351
7352       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7353       widget. How each operator behaves is described below. image  window  is
7354       the  image  currently displayed on your X server and image is the image
7355       obtained with the File Browser widget.
7356
7357       over    The result is the union of the two  image  shapes,  with  image
7358              obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7359
7360       in       The  result  is simply image cut by the shape of image window.
7361              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7362
7363       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7364              out.
7365
7366       atop     The  result  is  the  same  shape  as image window, with image
7367              obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7368              differs  from  over  because  the portion of image outside image
7369              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7370
7371       xor     The result is the image data from both image and  image  window
7372              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7373
7374       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7375              cropped to the maximum value (no overflow).  This  operation  is
7376              independent of the matte channels.
7377
7378       minus    The  result of image - image window, with underflow cropped to
7379              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to opaque,  full  cover‐
7380              age).
7381
7382       add      The  result  of  image  + image window, with overflow wrapping
7383              around (mod MaxRGB+1).
7384
7385       subtract
7386               The result of image - image  window,  with  underflow  wrapping
7387              around  (mod  MaxRGB+1).  The  add and subtract operators can be
7388              used to perform reversible transformations.
7389
7390       difference
7391               The result of abs(image - image window).  This  is  useful  for
7392              comparing two very similar images.
7393
7394       multiply
7395               The result of image * image window. This is useful for the cre‐
7396              ation of drop-shadows.
7397
7398       bumpmap
7399               The result of image window shaded by window.
7400
7401       replace
7402              The resulting image is image window replaced with  image.   Here
7403              the matte information is ignored.
7404
7405              The  image  compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel in the
7406              image for some operations. This extra channel usually defines  a
7407              mask  which  represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image.
7408              This is the case when matte is 255 (full  coverage)  for  pixels
7409              inside  the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on the
7410              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7411              ized  with  0  for any pixel matching in color to pixel location
7412              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7413              a matte channel.
7414
7415              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7416              colormapped X server  visuals  (e.g.  StaticColor,  StaticColor,
7417              GrayScale,   PseudoColor).   Correct  compositing  behavior  may
7418              require a TrueColor or DirectColor visual  or  a  Standard  Col‐
7419              ormap.
7420
7421              Choosing  a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7422              is replace.  However, you must choose a  location  to  composite
7423              your  image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7424              releasing and an outline of the image will appear  to  help  you
7425              identify your location.
7426
7427              The  actual  colors  of  the pasted image is saved. However, the
7428              color that appears in image window may be different.  For  exam‐
7429              ple,  on  a  monochrome screen image window will appear black or
7430              white even though your pasted image may have many colors. If the
7431              image  is saved to a file it is written with the correct colors.
7432              To assure the correct colors are saved in the final  image,  any
7433              PseudoClass  image is promoted to DirectClass.  To force a Pseu‐
7434              doClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7435

IMAGE CROPPING

7437       To begin, press choose Crop of the Transform submenu from  the  Command
7438       widget. Alternatively, press C in the image window.
7439
7440       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7441       window. You are now in crop mode. In crop mode, the Command widget  has
7442       these options:
7443
7444           Help
7445           Dismiss
7446
7447
7448       To  define  a  cropping  region,  press button 1 and drag. The cropping
7449       region is defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or  contracts
7450       as  it  follows  the  pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cropping
7451       region, release the button. You are now in  rectify  mode.  In  rectify
7452       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7453
7454           Crop
7455           Help
7456           Dismiss
7457
7458
7459       You  can  make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cropping
7460       rectangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Crop
7461       to  commit  your  cropping  region. To exit without cropping the image,
7462       press Dismiss.
7463

IMAGE CHOPPING

7465       An image is chopped interactively. There is no command line argument to
7466       chop an image. To begin, choose Chop of the Transform sub-menu from the
7467       Command widget. Alternatively, press [ in the Image window.
7468
7469       You are now in Chop mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.  In  Chop
7470       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7471
7472           Direction
7473
7474           horizontal
7475           vertical
7476
7477           Help
7478           Dismiss
7479
7480
7481       If  the  you choose the horizontal direction (this is the default), the
7482       area of the image between the two horizontal endpoints of the chop line
7483       is  removed.  Otherwise, the area of the image between the two vertical
7484       endpoints of the chop line is removed.
7485
7486       Select a location within the image window to begin your chop, press and
7487       hold  any  button.  Next,  move  the pointer to another location in the
7488       image.  As you move a line will connect the initial  location  and  the
7489       pointer. When you release the button, the area within the image to chop
7490       is determined by which direction you choose from the Command widget.
7491
7492       To cancel the image chopping, move the pointer  back  to  the  starting
7493       point of the line and release the button.
7494

IMAGE ROTATION

7496       Press  the  /  key  to  rotate  the image 90 degrees or \ to rotate -90
7497       degrees.  To  interactively  choose  the  degree  of  rotation,  choose
7498       Rotate...   of the Transform submenu from the Command Widget.  Alterna‐
7499       tively, press * in the image window.
7500
7501       A small horizontal line is drawn next to the pointer. You  are  now  in
7502       rotate  mode.  To  exit immediately, press Dismiss. In rotate mode, the
7503       Command widget has these options:
7504
7505           Pixel Color
7506
7507           black
7508           blue
7509           cyan
7510           green
7511           gray
7512           red
7513           magenta
7514           yellow
7515           white
7516           Browser...
7517
7518           Direction
7519
7520           horizontal
7521           vertical
7522
7523           Help
7524           Dismiss
7525
7526
7527       Choose a background color from the  Pixel  Color  sub-menu.  Additional
7528       background  colors  can  be  specified  with the color browser. You can
7529       change the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7530
7531       If you choose the color browser and press  Grab,  you  can  select  the
7532       background  color  by  moving  the  pointer to the desired color on the
7533       screen and press any button.
7534
7535       Choose a point in the image window and  press  this  button  and  hold.
7536       Next,  move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move a
7537       line connects the initial location and the pointer.  When  you  release
7538       the  button, the degree of image rotation is determined by the slope of
7539       the line you just drew. The slope is  relative  to  the  direction  you
7540       choose from the Direction sub-menu of the Command widget.
7541
7542       To  cancel  the  image  rotation, move the pointer back to the starting
7543       point of the line and release the button.
7544

IMAGE ANNOTATION

7546       An image is annotated interactively. There is no command line  argument
7547       to  annotate an image. To begin, choose Annotate of the Image Edit sub-
7548       menu from the Command widget. Alternatively, press a in the image  win‐
7549       dow.
7550
7551       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7552       window. You are now in annotate mode. To exit immediately,  press  Dis‐
7553       miss.  In annotate mode, the Command widget has these options:
7554
7555
7556       Font Name
7557
7558
7559       fixed
7560
7561       variable
7562
7563       5x8
7564
7565       6x10
7566
7567       7x13bold
7568
7569       8x13bold
7570
7571       9x15bold
7572
7573       10x20
7574
7575       12x24
7576
7577       Browser...
7578
7579
7580       Font Color
7581
7582
7583       black
7584
7585       blue
7586
7587       cyan
7588
7589       green
7590
7591       gray
7592
7593       red
7594
7595       magenta
7596
7597       yellow
7598
7599       white
7600
7601       transparent
7602
7603       Browser...
7604
7605
7606       Box Color
7607
7608
7609       black
7610
7611       blue
7612
7613       cyan
7614
7615       green
7616
7617       gray
7618
7619       red
7620
7621       magenta
7622
7623       yellow
7624
7625       white
7626
7627       transparent
7628
7629       Browser...
7630
7631
7632       Rotate Text
7633
7634
7635       -90
7636
7637       -45
7638
7639       -30
7640
7641       0
7642
7643       30
7644
7645       45
7646
7647       90
7648
7649       180
7650
7651       Dialog...
7652
7653
7654       Help
7655
7656       Dismiss
7657
7658
7659       Choose  a  font name from the Font Name sub-menu. Additional font names
7660       can be specified with the font browser. You can change the  menu  names
7661       by setting the X resources font1 through font9.
7662
7663       Choose  a font color from the Font Color sub-menu. Additional font col‐
7664       ors can be specified with the color browser. You can  change  the  menu
7665       colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7666
7667       If you select the color browser and press Grab, you can choose the font
7668       color by moving the pointer to the desired  color  on  the  screen  and
7669       press any button.
7670
7671       If  you choose to rotate the text, choose Rotate Text from the menu and
7672       select an angle. Typically you will only want to  rotate  one  line  of
7673       text at a time. Depending on the angle you choose, subsequent lines may
7674       end up overwriting each other.
7675
7676       Choosing a font and its color is optional. The default  font  is  fixed
7677       and  the default color is black. However, you must choose a location to
7678       begin entering text and press a button. An  underscore  character  will
7679       appear  at  the location of the pointer. The cursor changes to a pencil
7680       to indicate you are in text mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7681
7682       In text mode, any key presses will display the character at  the  loca‐
7683       tion  of  the  underscore and advance the underscore cursor. Enter your
7684       text and once completed press Apply to finish your image annotation. To
7685       correct  errors  press  BACK  SPACE.  To delete an entire line of text,
7686       press DELETE.  Any text that exceeds the boundaries of the image window
7687       is automatically continued onto the next line.
7688
7689       The  actual  color you request for the font is saved in the image. How‐
7690       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7691       example,  on  a  monochrome  screen the text will appear black or white
7692       even if you choose the color red as the font color. However, the  image
7693       saved  to  a  file with -write is written with red lettering. To assure
7694       the correct color text in the final image,  any  PseudoClass  image  is
7695       promoted  to DirectClass (see miff(5)). To force a PseudoClass image to
7696       remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7697

IMAGE COMPOSITING

7699       An image composite is created interactively. There is no  command  line
7700       argument to composite an image. To begin, choose Composite of the Image
7701       Edit from the Command widget. Alternatively, press x in the Image  win‐
7702       dow.
7703
7704       First  a  popup  window  is  displayed requesting you to enter an image
7705       name.  Press Composite, Grab or type a file name. Press Cancel  if  you
7706       choose  not to create a composite image. When you choose Grab, move the
7707       pointer to the desired window and press any button.
7708
7709       If the Composite image does not have any  matte  information,  you  are
7710       informed  and  the file browser is displayed again. Enter the name of a
7711       mask image. The image is typically grayscale and the same size  as  the
7712       composite  image.  If  the  image  is not grayscale, it is converted to
7713       grayscale and the resulting intensities are used as matte information.
7714
7715       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7716       window.  You are now in composite mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7717       miss.  In composite mode, the Command widget has these options:
7718
7719
7720       Operators
7721
7722
7723       over
7724
7725       in
7726
7727       out
7728
7729       atop
7730
7731       xor
7732
7733       plus
7734
7735       minus
7736
7737       add
7738
7739       subtract
7740
7741       difference
7742
7743       bumpmap
7744
7745       replace
7746
7747
7748       Blend
7749
7750       Displace
7751
7752       Help
7753
7754       Dismiss
7755
7756
7757       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7758       widget.  How  each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7759       the image currently displayed on your X server and image is  the  image
7760       obtained
7761
7762       over     The  result  is  the union of the two image shapes, with image
7763              obscuring image window in the region of overlap.
7764
7765       in      The result is simply image cut by the shape  of  image  window.
7766              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7767
7768       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7769              out.
7770
7771       atop    The result is the  same  shape  as  image  window,  with  image
7772              obscuring image window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7773              differs from over because the portion  of  image  outside  image
7774              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7775
7776       xor      The  result is the image data from both image and image window
7777              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7778
7779       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7780              cropped  to  255 (no overflow). This operation is independent of
7781              the matte channels.
7782
7783       minus   The result of image - image window, with underflow  cropped  to
7784              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to 255, full coverage).
7785
7786       add      The  result  of  image  + image window, with overflow wrapping
7787              around (mod 256).
7788
7789       subtract
7790               The result of image - image  window,  with  underflow  wrapping
7791              around  (mod 256). The add and subtract operators can be used to
7792              perform reversible transformations.
7793
7794       difference
7795               The result of abs(image - image window).  This  is  useful  for
7796              comparing two very similar images.
7797
7798       bumpmap
7799               The result of image window shaded by window.
7800
7801       replace
7802                The resulting image is image window replaced with image.  Here
7803              the matte information is ignored.
7804
7805              The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel  in  the
7806              image  for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7807              mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for  the  image.
7808              This  is  the  case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7809              inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on  the
7810              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7811              ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color  to  pixel  location
7812              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7813              a matte channel.
7814
7815              If you choose blend, the composite operator becomes  over.   The
7816              image  matte channel percent transparency is initialized to fac‐
7817              tor.  The image window is  initialized  to  (100-factor).  Where
7818              factor is the value you specify in the Dialog widget.
7819
7820              Displace  shifts  the  image pixels as defined by a displacement
7821              map.  With this option, image is used  as  a  displacement  map.
7822              Black,  within  the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
7823              placement. White is a maximum negative displacement  and  middle
7824              gray  is  neutral.  The  displacement is scaled to determine the
7825              pixel shift. By default, the displacement applies  in  both  the
7826              horizontal  and  vertical  directions.  However,  if you specify
7827              mask, image is the horizontal X displacement and mask the verti‐
7828              cal Y displacement.
7829
7830              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7831              colormapped X server visuals  (e.g.   StaticColor,  StaticColor,
7832              GrayScale,   PseudoColor).   Correct  compositing  behavior  may
7833              require a TrueColor or DirectColor visual  or  a  Standard  Col‐
7834              ormap.
7835
7836              Choosing  a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7837              is replace.  However, you must choose a  location  to  composite
7838              your  image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7839              releasing and an outline of the image will appear  to  help  you
7840              identify your location.
7841
7842              The  actual colors of the composite image is saved. However, the
7843              color that appears in image window may be different.  For  exam‐
7844              ple,  on  a  monochrome screen Image window will appear black or
7845              white even though your composited image may have many colors. If
7846              the image is saved to a file it is written with the correct col‐
7847              ors. To assure the correct colors are saved in the final  image,
7848              any PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass (see miff).  To
7849              force a PseudoClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7850

COLOR EDITING

7852       Changing the the color of a set of pixels is  performed  interactively.
7853       There  is  no  command  line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, choose
7854       Color from the Image Edit submenu  of  the  Command  widget.   Alterna‐
7855       tively, press c in the image window.
7856
7857       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7858       window. You are now in color edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7859       miss.  In color edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7860
7861
7862       Method
7863
7864
7865       point
7866
7867       replace
7868
7869       floodfill
7870
7871       reset
7872
7873
7874       Pixel Color
7875
7876
7877       black
7878
7879       blue
7880
7881       cyan
7882
7883       green
7884
7885       gray
7886
7887       red
7888
7889       magenta
7890
7891       yellow
7892
7893       white
7894
7895       Browser...
7896
7897
7898       Border Color
7899
7900
7901       black
7902
7903       blue
7904
7905       cyan
7906
7907       green
7908
7909       gray
7910
7911       red
7912
7913       magenta
7914
7915       yellow
7916
7917       white
7918
7919       Browser...
7920
7921
7922       Fuzz
7923
7924
7925       0
7926
7927       2
7928
7929       4
7930
7931       8
7932
7933       16
7934           Dialog...
7935
7936
7937       Undo
7938
7939       Help
7940
7941       Dismiss
7942
7943
7944       Choose  a  color editing method from the Method sub-menu of the Command
7945       widget. The point method recolors any pixel selected with  the  pointer
7946       unless  the  button  is released. The replace method recolors any pixel
7947       that matches the color of the pixel you select  with  a  button  press.
7948       Floodfill  recolors  any  pixel that matches the color of the pixel you
7949       select with a button press and is  a  neighbor.   Whereas  filltoborder
7950       changes  the  matte  value of any neighbor pixel that is not the border
7951       color.  Finally reset changes the entire image to the designated color.
7952
7953       Next, choose a pixel color from the Pixel  Color  sub-menu.  Additional
7954       pixel  colors  can  be specified with the color browser. You can change
7955       the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7956
7957       Now press button 1 to select a pixel within the Image window to  change
7958       its  color.  Additional  pixels  may  be recolored as prescribed by the
7959       method you choose. additional pixels by increasing the Delta value.
7960
7961       If the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning  your
7962       pointer  within  the  image  (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can
7963       select a pixel to recolor from within  the  Magnify  widget.  Move  the
7964       pointer  to  the  Magnify widget and position the pixel with the cursor
7965       control keys. Finally, press a button to recolor the selected pixel (or
7966       pixels).
7967
7968       The actual color you request for the pixels is saved in the image. How‐
7969       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7970       example,  on  a  monochrome screen the pixel will appear black or white
7971       even if you choose the color red as the pixel color. However, the image
7972       saved  to  a file with -write is written with red pixels. To assure the
7973       correct color text in the final image, any PseudoClass  image  is  pro‐
7974       moted  to  DirectClass  To  force a PseudoClass image to remain Pseudo‐
7975       Class, use -colors.
7976

MATTE EDITING

7978       Matte information within an image is useful for some operations such as
7979       image compositing. This extra channel usually defines a mask which rep‐
7980       resents a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image. This is the case  when
7981       matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels inside the shape, zero outside,
7982       and between zero and 255 on the boundary.
7983
7984       Setting the matte information in an image is done interactively.  There
7985       is no command line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, and choose Matte
7986       of the Image Edit sub-menu from the Command widget.
7987
7988       Alternatively, press m in the image window.
7989
7990       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7991       window. You are now in matte edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7992       miss.  In matte edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7993
7994
7995       Method
7996
7997
7998       point
7999
8000       replace
8001
8002       floodfill
8003
8004       reset
8005
8006
8007       Border Color
8008
8009
8010       black
8011
8012       blue
8013
8014       cyan
8015
8016       green
8017
8018       gray
8019
8020       red
8021
8022       magenta
8023
8024       yellow
8025
8026       white
8027
8028       Browser...
8029
8030
8031       Fuzz
8032
8033
8034       0
8035
8036       2
8037
8038       4
8039
8040       8
8041
8042       16
8043           Dialog...
8044
8045
8046       Matte
8047
8048       Undo
8049
8050       Help
8051
8052       Dismiss
8053
8054       Choose a matte editing method from the Method sub-menu of  the  Command
8055       widget.  The  point  method  changes  the  matte value of the any pixel
8056       selected with the pointer until the button  is  released.  The  replace
8057       method  changes  the matte value of any pixel that matches the color of
8058       the pixel you select with a button press. Floodfill changes  the  matte
8059       value  of any pixel that matches the color of the pixel you select with
8060       a button press and is a neighbor.  Whereas  filltoborder  recolors  any
8061       neighbor  pixel that is not the border color. Finally reset changes the
8062       entire image to the designated matte value.  Choose Matte Value  and  a
8063       dialog  appears  requesting a matte value.  Enter a value between 0 and
8064       255. This value is assigned as the matte value of the selected pixel or
8065       pixels.   Now, press any button to select a pixel within the Image win‐
8066       dow to change its matte value. You can change the matte value of  addi‐
8067       tional  pixels  by increasing the Delta value. The Delta value is first
8068       added then subtracted from the red,  green,  and  blue  of  the  target
8069       color. Any pixels within the range also have their matte value updated.
8070       If the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning  your
8071       pointer  within  the  image  (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can
8072       select a pixel to change the matte value from within the  Magnify  wid‐
8073       get.   Move  the  pointer  to the Magnify widget and position the pixel
8074       with the cursor control keys. Finally, press a  button  to  change  the
8075       matte  value  of  the selected pixel (or pixels).  Matte information is
8076       only valid in a DirectClass image. Therefore, any PseudoClass image  is
8077       promoted to DirectClass. Note that matte information for PseudoClass is
8078       not retained for colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor,  Stat‐
8079       icColor, GrayScale, PseudoColor) unless you immediately save your image
8080       to a file (refer to Write). Correct matte editing behavior may  require
8081       a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
8082

IMAGE DRAWING

8084       An image is drawn upon interactively. There is no command line argument
8085       to draw on an image. To begin, choose Draw of the Image  Edit  sub-menu
8086       from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press d in the image window.
8087
8088       The  cursor changes to a crosshair to indicate you are in draw mode. To
8089       exit immediately, press Dismiss. In draw mode, the Command  widget  has
8090       these options:
8091
8092
8093       Primitive
8094
8095
8096       point
8097
8098       line
8099
8100       rectangle
8101
8102       fill rectangle
8103
8104       circle
8105
8106       fill circle
8107
8108       ellipse
8109
8110       fill ellipse
8111
8112       polygon
8113
8114       fill polygon
8115
8116
8117       Color
8118
8119
8120       black
8121
8122       blue
8123
8124       cyan
8125
8126       green
8127
8128       gray
8129
8130       red
8131
8132       magenta
8133
8134       yellow
8135
8136       white
8137
8138       transparent
8139
8140       Browser...
8141
8142
8143       Stipple
8144
8145
8146       Brick
8147
8148       Diagonal
8149
8150       Scales
8151
8152       Vertical
8153
8154       Wavy
8155
8156       Translucent
8157
8158       Opaque
8159
8160       Open...
8161
8162
8163       Width
8164
8165
8166       1
8167
8168       2
8169
8170       4
8171
8172       8
8173
8174       16
8175           Dialog...
8176
8177
8178       Undo
8179
8180       Help
8181
8182       Dismiss
8183
8184       Choose a drawing primitive from the Primitive sub-menu.
8185
8186       Next,  choose a color from the Color sub-menu. Additional colors can be
8187       specified with the color browser. You can change  the  menu  colors  by
8188       setting  the  X  resources  pen1  through  pen9.  The transparent color
8189       updates the image matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8190
8191       If you choose the color browser and press  Grab,  you  can  select  the
8192       primitive  color  by  moving  the  pointer  to the desired color on the
8193       screen and press any button. The transparent color  updates  the  image
8194       matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8195
8196       Choose a stipple, if appropriate, from the Stipple sub-menu. Additional
8197       stipples can be specified with the file browser. Stipples obtained from
8198       the file browser must be on disk in the X11 bitmap format.
8199
8200       Choose a line width, if appropriate, from the Width sub-menu. To choose
8201       a specific width select the Dialog widget.
8202
8203       Choose a point in the image window and press button 1 and  hold.  Next,
8204       move  the pointer to another location in the image. As you move, a line
8205       connects the initial location and the pointer.  When  you  release  the
8206       button,  the  image  is  updated  with the primitive you just drew. For
8207       polygons, the image is updated when you press and  release  the  button
8208       without moving the pointer.
8209
8210       To cancel image drawing, move the pointer back to the starting point of
8211       the line and release the button.
8212

REGION OF INTEREST

8214       To begin, press choose Region of Interest of the Pixel  Transform  sub-
8215       menu from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press R in the image win‐
8216       dow.
8217
8218       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
8219       window.  You  are now in region of interest mode. In region of interest
8220       mode, the Command widget has these options:
8221
8222
8223       Help
8224
8225       Dismiss
8226
8227
8228       To define a region of interest, press button 1 and drag. The region  of
8229       interest  is  defined  by  a highlighted rectangle that expands or con‐
8230       tracts as it follows the pointer.  Once  you  are  satisfied  with  the
8231       region  of  interest, release the button. You are now in apply mode. In
8232       apply mode the Command widget has these options:
8233
8234
8235       File
8236
8237
8238       Save...
8239
8240       Print...
8241
8242
8243       Edit
8244
8245
8246       Undo
8247
8248       Redo
8249
8250
8251       Transform
8252
8253
8254       Flip
8255
8256       Flop
8257
8258       Rotate Right
8259
8260       Rotate Left
8261
8262
8263       Enhance
8264
8265
8266       Hue...
8267
8268       Saturation...
8269
8270       Brightness...
8271
8272       Gamma...
8273
8274       Spiff
8275
8276       Dull
8277
8278       Equalize
8279
8280       Normalize
8281
8282       Negate
8283
8284       GRAYscale
8285
8286       Quantize...
8287
8288
8289       Effects
8290
8291
8292       Despeckle
8293
8294       Emboss
8295
8296       Reduce Noise
8297
8298       Add Noise
8299
8300       Sharpen...
8301
8302       Blur...
8303
8304       Threshold...
8305
8306       Edge Detect...
8307
8308       Spread...
8309
8310       Shade...
8311
8312       Raise...
8313
8314       Segment...
8315
8316
8317
8318
8319       F/X
8320
8321
8322       Solarize...
8323
8324       Swirl...
8325
8326       Implode...
8327
8328       Wave...
8329
8330       Oil Paint
8331
8332       Charcoal Draw...
8333
8334
8335
8336
8337       Miscellany
8338
8339
8340       Image Info
8341
8342       Zoom Image
8343
8344       Show Preview...
8345
8346       Show Histogram
8347
8348       Show Matte
8349
8350
8351       Help
8352
8353       Dismiss
8354
8355
8356       You can make adjustments to  the  region  of  interest  by  moving  the
8357       pointer  to  one of the rectangle corners, pressing a button, and drag‐
8358       ging. Finally, choose an image processing technique  from  the  Command
8359       widget.  You  can  choose  more  than one image processing technique to
8360       apply to an area. Alternatively, you can move the  region  of  interest
8361       before applying another image processing technique. To exit, press Dis‐
8362       miss.
8363

IMAGE PANNING

8365       When an image exceeds the width or height of the X server screen,  dis‐
8366       play  maps  a small panning icon. The rectangle within the panning icon
8367       shows the area that is currently displayed in the the image window.  To
8368       pan  about  the image, press any button and drag the pointer within the
8369       panning icon.  The pan rectangle moves with the pointer and  the  image
8370       window  is  updated to reflect the location of the rectangle within the
8371       panning icon. When you have selected the area of the image you wish  to
8372       view, release the button.
8373
8374       Use  the arrow keys to pan the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
8375       within the image window.
8376
8377       The panning icon is withdrawn if the image  becomes  smaller  than  the
8378       dimensions of the X server screen.
8379

USER PREFERENCES

8381       Preferences  affect the default behavior of display(1). The preferences
8382       are either true or false and are stored in your home directory as .dis‐
8383       playrc:
8384
8385                display image centered on a backdrop"
8386
8387
8388                    This  backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is
8389                    useful for hiding other X window  activity  while  viewing
8390                    the  image.  The color of the backdrop is specified as the
8391                    background color. Refer to X Resources for details.
8392                confirm on program exit"
8393
8394
8395                    Ask for a confirmation before exiting the display(1)  pro‐
8396                    gram.
8397                correct image for display gamma"
8398
8399
8400                    If  the image has a known gamma, the gamma is corrected to
8401                    match that of the  X  server  (see  the  X  Resource  dis‐
8402                    playGamma).
8403                display warning messages"
8404
8405
8406                    Display any warning messages.
8407                apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to image"
8408
8409
8410                    The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity res‐
8411                    olution for spatial resolution by averaging  the  intensi‐
8412                    ties  of  several neighboring pixels.  Images which suffer
8413                    from  severe  contouring  when  reducing  colors  can   be
8414                    improved with this preference.
8415                use a shared colormap for colormapped X visuals"
8416
8417
8418                    This  option only applies when the default X server visual
8419                    is PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer  to  -visual  for  more
8420                    details.  By  default, a shared colormap is allocated. The
8421                    image shares colors with other X clients.  Some image col‐
8422                    ors  could  be approximated, therefore your image may look
8423                    very different than intended. Otherwise the  image  colors
8424                    appear exactly as they are defined. However, other clients
8425                    may go technicolor when the image colormap is installed.
8426                display images as an X server pixmap"
8427
8428
8429                    Images are maintained as a XImage  by  default.  Set  this
8430                    resource  to True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This
8431                    option is useful if your image exceeds the  dimensions  of
8432                    your  server  screen and you intend to pan the image. Pan‐
8433                    ning is much faster  with  Pixmaps  than  with  a  XImage.
8434                    Pixmaps  are considered a precious resource, use them with
8435                    discretion.
8436
8437
8438
8439       GM IDENTIFY
8440
8441              Identify describes the format and characteristics of one or more
8442              image  files  as  internally  supported by the software. It will
8443              also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.  The  informa‐
8444              tion  displayed  includes  the  scene number, the file name, the
8445              width and height of the image, whether the image is  colormapped
8446              or  not,  the number of colors in the image, the number of bytes
8447              in the image, the format of the image  (JPEG,  PNM,  etc.),  and
8448              finally the number of seconds in both user time and elapsed time
8449              it took to read and process the image.  If -verbose or +ping are
8450              provided as an option, the pixel read rate is also displayed. An
8451              example line output from identify follows:
8452
8453                  images/aquarium.miff 640x480 PseudoClass 256c
8454                         308135b MIFF 0.000u 0:01
8455
8456
8457              If -verbose is set, expect additional output including any image
8458              comment:
8459
8460
8461                  Image: images/aquarium.miff
8462                  class: PseudoClass
8463                  colors: 256
8464                  signature: eb5dca81dd93ae7e6ffae99a527eb5dca8...
8465                  matte: False
8466                  geometry: 640x480
8467                     depth: 8
8468                  bytes: 308135
8469                  format: MIFF
8470                  comments:
8471                  Imported from MTV raster image: aquarium.mtv
8472
8473
8474              For  some  formats, additional format-specific information about
8475              the file will be written if  the  -debug  coder  or  -debug  all
8476              option is used.
8477

IDENTIFY OPTIONS

8479       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8480       the command line remains in effect for the set  of  images  immediately
8481       following,  until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option
8482       or -noop.
8483
8484       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8485
8486
8487       -authenticate <string>
8488              decrypt image with this password
8489
8490       -debug <events>
8491              enable debug printout
8492
8493       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8494              add coder/decoder specific options
8495
8496       -density <width>x<height>
8497              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8498
8499       -depth <value>
8500              depth of the image
8501
8502       -format <string>
8503              output formatted image characteristics
8504
8505       -help  print usage instructions
8506
8507       -interlace <type>
8508              the type of interlacing scheme
8509
8510       -limit <type> <value>
8511              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
8512              resource limit
8513
8514       -log <string>
8515              Specify format for debug log
8516
8517       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8518
8519       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8520              chroma subsampling factors
8521
8522       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
8523              width and height of the image
8524
8525       -verbose
8526              print detailed information about the image
8527
8528       -version
8529              print GraphicsMagick version string
8530
8531              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
8532              above.
8533
8534

GM IMPORT

8536       Import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
8537       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
8538       screen, or any rectangular portion of  the  screen.   Use  display  for
8539       redisplay,  printing, editing, formatting, archiving, image processing,
8540       etc. of the captured image.
8541
8542       The target window can be specified by id, name, or may be  selected  by
8543       clicking  the  mouse  in  the desired window. If you press a button and
8544       then drag, a rectangle will form which expands  and  contracts  as  the
8545       mouse  moves.  To save the portion of the screen defined by the rectan‐
8546       gle, just release the button. The keyboard bell is  rung  once  at  the
8547       beginning of the screen capture and twice when it completes.
8548

EXAMPLES

8550       To  select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and save
8551       it in the MIFF image format to a file entitled window.miff, use:
8552
8553           gm import window.miff
8554
8555
8556       To select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and  save
8557       it  in  the  Encapsulated PostScript format to include in another docu‐
8558       ment, use:
8559
8560           gm import figure.eps
8561
8562
8563       To capture the entire X server screen in the JPEG  image  format  in  a
8564       file entitled root.jpeg, without using the mouse, use:
8565
8566           gm import -window root root.jpeg
8567
8568
8569       To  capture  the 512x256 area at the upper right corner of the X server
8570       screen in the PNG image format in a well-compressed file entitled  cor‐
8571       ner.png, without using the mouse,  use:
8572
8573           gm import -window root -crop 512x256-0+0 -quality 90
8574                  corner.png
8575
8576

OPTIONS

8578       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8579       the command line remains in effect until it is  explicitly  changed  by
8580       specifying the option again with a different effect.
8581
8582       Import  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resources
8583       file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values  specified
8584       in your X resources file.
8585
8586       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8587
8588
8589       -bordercolor <color>
8590              the border color
8591
8592       -colors <value>
8593              preferred number of colors in the image
8594
8595       -colorspace <value>
8596              the type of colorspace
8597
8598       -comment <string>
8599              annotate an image with a comment
8600
8601       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8602              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8603
8604       -debug <events>
8605              enable debug printout
8606
8607       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8608              add coder/decoder specific options
8609
8610       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8611              display the next image after pausing
8612
8613       -density <width>x<height>
8614              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8615
8616       -depth <value>
8617              depth of the image
8618
8619       -descend
8620              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
8621
8622       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8623              specifies the X server to contact
8624
8625       -dispose <method>
8626              GIF disposal method
8627
8628       -dither
8629              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8630
8631       -encoding <type>
8632              specify the text encoding
8633
8634       -endian <type>
8635              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8636
8637       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
8638
8639       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8640              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8641
8642       -help  print usage instructions
8643
8644       -interlace <type>
8645              the type of interlacing scheme
8646
8647       -label <name>
8648              assign a label to an image
8649
8650       -limit <type> <value>
8651              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
8652              resource limit
8653
8654       -log <string>
8655              Specify format for debug log
8656
8657       -monitor
8658              show progress indication
8659
8660       -monochrome
8661              transform the image to black and white
8662
8663       -negate
8664              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8665
8666       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8667              size and location of an image canvas
8668
8669       -pause <seconds>
8670              pause between snapshots [import]
8671
8672       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8673
8674       -pointsize <value>
8675              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8676
8677       -quality <value>
8678              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8679
8680       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8681              resize an image
8682
8683       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8684              rotate the image
8685
8686       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8687              chroma subsampling factors
8688
8689       -scene <value>
8690              set scene number
8691
8692       -screen
8693              specify the screen to capture
8694
8695       -set <attribute> <value>
8696              set an image attribute
8697
8698       +set <attribute>
8699              unset an image attribute
8700
8701       -silent
8702              operate silently
8703
8704       -snaps <value>
8705              number of screen snapshots
8706
8707       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8708              resize an image (quickly)
8709
8710       -transparent <color>
8711              make this color transparent within the image
8712
8713       -trim  trim an image
8714
8715       -verbose
8716              print detailed information about the image
8717
8718       -version
8719              print GraphicsMagick version string
8720
8721              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
8722              above.
8723
8724

GM MOGRIFY

8726       Mogrify  transforms  an image or a sequence of images. These transforms
8727       include image scaling, image rotation,  color  reduction,  and  others.
8728       Each  transmogrified image overwrites the corresponding original image,
8729       unless an option such as -format causes the output filename to be  dif‐
8730       ferent from the input filename.
8731
8732       The  graphics  formats  supported by mogrify are listed in GraphicsMag‐
8733       ick(1).
8734

EXAMPLES

8736       To convert all the TIFF files in a particular directory to JPEG, use:
8737
8738           gm mogrify -format jpeg *.tiff
8739
8740
8741       To convert a directory full of JPEG images to thumbnails, use:
8742
8743           gm mogrify -size 120x120 *.jpg -resize 120x120 +profile "*"
8744
8745
8746       In this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder  that
8747       the  images  are  going to be downscaled to 120x120, allowing it to run
8748       faster by avoiding returning full-resolution images  to  GraphicsMagick
8749       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
8750       the desired dimensions of the output images.  It will be scaled so  its
8751       largest  dimension  is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes any ICM,
8752       EXIF, IPTC, or other profiles that might be present in  the  input  and
8753       aren't needed in the thumbnails.
8754
8755       To  scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and 480
8756       pixels in height, use:
8757
8758           gm mogrify -resize 640x480! cockatoo.miff
8759
8760

OPTIONS

8762       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8763       the  command line remains in effect for the set of images that follows,
8764       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
8765
8766       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8767
8768
8769       -affine <matrix>
8770              drawing transform matrix
8771
8772       -antialias
8773              remove pixel aliasing
8774
8775        -asc-cdl <spec>
8776              apply ASC CDL color transform
8777
8778       -authenticate <string>
8779              decrypt image with this password
8780
8781       -auto-orient
8782              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
8783
8784       -background <color>
8785              the background color
8786
8787       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
8788              pixels below the threshold become black
8789
8790       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
8791              blue chromaticity primary point
8792
8793       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
8794              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8795
8796       -border <width>x<height>
8797              surround the image with a border of color
8798
8799       -bordercolor <color>
8800              the border color
8801
8802       -channel <type>
8803              the type of channel
8804
8805       -charcoal <factor>
8806              simulate a charcoal drawing
8807
8808       -colorize <value>
8809              colorize the image with the pen color
8810
8811       -colors <value>
8812              preferred number of colors in the image
8813
8814       -colorspace <value>
8815              the type of colorspace
8816
8817       -comment <string>
8818              annotate an image with a comment
8819
8820       -compose <operator>
8821              the type of image composition
8822
8823       -compress <type>
8824              the type of image compression
8825
8826       -contrast
8827              enhance or reduce the image contrast
8828
8829       -convolve <kernel>
8830              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
8831
8832       -create-directories
8833              create output directory if required
8834
8835       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8836              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8837
8838       -cycle <amount>
8839              displace image colormap by amount
8840
8841       -debug <events>
8842              enable debug printout
8843
8844       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8845              add coder/decoder specific options
8846
8847       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8848              display the next image after pausing
8849
8850       -density <width>x<height>
8851              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8852
8853       -depth <value>
8854              depth of the image
8855
8856       -despeckle
8857              reduce the speckles within an image
8858
8859       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8860              specifies the X server to contact
8861
8862       -dispose <method>
8863              GIF disposal method
8864
8865       -dither
8866              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8867
8868       -draw <string>
8869              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
8870
8871       -edge <radius>
8872              detect edges within an image
8873
8874       -emboss <radius>
8875              emboss an image
8876
8877       -encoding <type>
8878              specify the text encoding
8879
8880       -endian <type>
8881              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8882
8883       -enhance
8884              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
8885
8886       -equalize
8887              perform histogram equalization to the image
8888
8889       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8890              composite image on background color canvas image
8891
8892       -fill <color>
8893              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
8894
8895       -filter <type>
8896              use this type of filter when resizing an image
8897
8898       -flip  create a "mirror image"
8899
8900       -flop  create a "mirror image"
8901
8902       -font <name>
8903              use this font when annotating the image with text
8904
8905       -format <type>
8906              the image format type
8907
8908       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
8909              surround the image with an ornamental border
8910
8911       -fuzz <distance>{%}
8912              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
8913
8914       -gamma <value>
8915              level of gamma correction
8916
8917       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
8918              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8919
8920       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8921              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8922
8923       -gravity <type>
8924              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
8925
8926       -green-primary <x>,<y>
8927              green chromaticity primary point
8928
8929       -hald-clut <clut>
8930              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
8931
8932       -help  print usage instructions
8933
8934       -implode <factor>
8935              implode image pixels about the center
8936
8937       -interlace <type>
8938              the type of interlacing scheme
8939
8940       -label <name>
8941              assign a label to an image
8942
8943       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
8944              perform local adaptive thresholding
8945
8946       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
8947              adjust the level of image contrast
8948
8949       -limit <type> <value>
8950              Disk, File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or  Threads
8951              resource limit
8952
8953       -linewidth
8954              the line width for subsequent draw operations
8955
8956       -list <type>
8957              the type of list
8958
8959       -log <string>
8960              Specify format for debug log
8961
8962       -loop <iterations>
8963              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
8964
8965       -magnify
8966              magnify the image
8967
8968       -map <filename>
8969              choose a particular set of colors from this image
8970
8971       -mask <filename>
8972              Specify a clipping mask
8973
8974       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
8975
8976       -mattecolor <color>
8977              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
8978
8979       -median <radius>
8980              apply a median filter to the image
8981
8982       -minify <factor>
8983              minify the image
8984
8985       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
8986              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
8987
8988       -monitor
8989              show progress indication
8990
8991       -monochrome
8992              transform the image to black and white
8993
8994       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
8995              Simulate motion blur
8996
8997       -negate
8998              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8999
9000       -noise <radius|type>
9001              add or reduce noise in an image
9002
9003       -noop  NOOP (no option)
9004
9005       -normalize
9006              transform image to span the full range of color values
9007
9008       -opaque <color>
9009              change this color to the pen color within the image
9010
9011       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
9012              apply  a  mathematical,  bitwise,  or value operator to an image
9013              channel
9014
9015       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
9016              ordered dither the image
9017
9018       -output-directory <directory>
9019              output files to directory
9020
9021       -orient <orientation>
9022              Set the image orientation attribute
9023
9024       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9025              size and location of an image canvas
9026
9027       -paint <radius>
9028              simulate an oil painting
9029
9030       -pen <color>
9031              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9032
9033       -pointsize <value>
9034              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9035
9036       -profile <filename>
9037              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
9038
9039       -preserve-timestamp
9040              preserve the original timestamps of the file
9041
9042       -quality <value>
9043              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9044
9045       -raise <width>x<height>
9046              lighten or darken image edges
9047
9048       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
9049              random threshold the image
9050
9051       -recolor <matrix>
9052              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
9053
9054       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9055              red chromaticity primary point
9056
9057       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9058              apply options to a portion of the image
9059
9060       -render
9061              render vector operations
9062
9063       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9064              Adjust image page offsets
9065
9066       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
9067              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
9068
9069       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9070              resize an image
9071
9072       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
9073              roll an image vertically or horizontally
9074
9075       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9076              rotate the image
9077
9078       -sample <geometry>
9079              scale image using pixel sampling
9080
9081       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9082              chroma subsampling factors
9083
9084       -scale <geometry>
9085              scale the image.
9086
9087       -scene <value>
9088              set scene number
9089
9090       -set <attribute> <value>
9091              set an image attribute
9092
9093       +set <attribute>
9094              unset an image attribute
9095
9096       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
9097              segment an image
9098
9099       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
9100              shade the image using a distant light source
9101
9102       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9103              sharpen the image
9104
9105       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
9106              shave pixels from the image edges
9107
9108       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
9109              shear the image along the X or Y axis
9110
9111       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9112              width and height of the image
9113
9114       -solarize <factor>
9115              negate all pixels above the threshold level
9116
9117       -spread <amount>
9118              displace image pixels by a random amount
9119
9120       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9121
9122       -stroke <color>
9123              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9124
9125       -strokewidth <value>
9126              set the stroke width
9127
9128       -swirl <degrees>
9129              swirl image pixels about the center
9130
9131       -texture <filename>
9132              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9133
9134       -threshold <value>{%}
9135              threshold the image
9136
9137       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9138              resize an image (quickly)
9139
9140       -tile <filename>
9141              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
9142
9143       -transform
9144              transform the image
9145
9146       -transparent <color>
9147              make this color transparent within the image
9148
9149       -treedepth <value>
9150              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9151
9152       -trim  trim an image
9153
9154       -type <type>
9155              the image type
9156
9157       -units <type>
9158              the units of image resolution
9159
9160       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
9161              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
9162
9163       -verbose
9164              print detailed information about the image
9165
9166       -version
9167              print GraphicsMagick version string
9168
9169       -view <string>
9170              FlashPix viewing parameters
9171
9172       -virtual-pixel <method>
9173              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
9174
9175       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
9176              alter an image along a sine wave
9177
9178       -white-point <x>,<y>
9179              chromaticity white point
9180
9181       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
9182              pixels above the threshold become white
9183
9184              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
9185              above.
9186
9187

GM MONTAGE

9189       montage creates a composite image by combining several separate images.
9190       The images are tiled on the composite image with the name of the  image
9191       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
9192
9193       The composite image is constructed in the following manner. First, each
9194       image specified on the command line, except for the last, is scaled  to
9195       fit the maximum tile size. The maximum tile size by default is 120x120.
9196       It can be modified with  the  -geometry  command  line  argument  or  X
9197       resource.  See  Options for more information on command line arguments.
9198       See X(1) for more information on X resources.  Note  that  the  maximum
9199       tile size need not be a square.
9200
9201       Next the composite image is initialized with the color specified by the
9202       -background command line argument or X resource. The width  and  height
9203       of  the composite image is determined by the title specified, the maxi‐
9204       mum tile size, the number of tiles per row, the tile border  width  and
9205       height,  the  image  border  width, and the label height. The number of
9206       tiles per row specifies how many images are to appear in  each  row  of
9207       the  composite  image. The default is to have 5 tiles in each row and 4
9208       tiles in each column of the composite.  A specific value  is  specified
9209       with  -tile.  The  tile  border  width and height, and the image border
9210       width defaults to the value of the X resource -borderwidth. It  can  be
9211       changed  with  the -borderwidth or -geometry command line argument or X
9212       resource. The label height is determined by the font you  specify  with
9213       the  -font command line argument or X resource. If you do not specify a
9214       font, a font is chosen that allows the name of the  image  to  fit  the
9215       maximum  width  of a tiled area.  The label colors is determined by the
9216       -background and -fill command line argument or X resource.  Note,  that
9217       if the background and pen colors are the same, labels will not appear.
9218
9219       Initially,  the  composite  image  title is placed at the top if one is
9220       specified (refer to -fill). Next, each image is set onto the  composite
9221       image,  surrounded  by  its  border  color, with its name centered just
9222       below it. The individual images are left-justified within the width  of
9223       the  tiled area.  The order of the images is the same as they appear on
9224       the command line unless the images have a scene  keyword.  If  a  scene
9225       number  is  specified in each image, then the images are tiled onto the
9226       composite in the order of their scene number. Finally, the  last  argu‐
9227       ment  on  the command line is the name assigned to the composite image.
9228       By default, the image is written in the MIFF format and can  be  viewed
9229       or printed with display(1).
9230
9231
9232       Note,  that  if the number of tiles exceeds the default number of 20 (5
9233       per row, 4 per column), more than one composite image  is  created.  To
9234       ensure  a single image is produced, use -tile to increase the number of
9235       tiles to meet or exceed the number of input images.
9236
9237       Finally, to create one or more empty spaces in the sequence  of  tiles,
9238       use the "NULL:" image format.
9239
9240       Note,  a  composite  MIFF  image  displayed to an X server with display
9241       behaves differently than other images. You can think of  the  composite
9242       as  a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of the composite
9243       and press a button to display it. See display(1) and miff(5)
9244

EXAMPLES

9246       To create a montage of a cockatoo, a  parrot,  and  a  hummingbird  and
9247       write it to a file called birds, use:
9248
9249           gm montage cockatoo.miff parrot.miff hummingbird.miff
9250                   birds.miff
9251
9252
9253       To  tile  several  bird  images  so that they are at most 256 pixels in
9254       width and 192 pixels in height, surrounded by a red border,  and  sepa‐
9255       rated by 10 pixels of background color, use:
9256
9257           gm montage -geometry 256x192+10+10 -bordercolor red
9258                   birds.* montage.miff
9259
9260
9261       To  create an unlabeled parrot image, 640 by 480 pixels, and surrounded
9262       by a border of black, use:
9263
9264           gm montage -geometry 640x480 -bordercolor black
9265                   -label "" parrot.miff bird.miff
9266
9267
9268       To create an image of an eagle with a textured background, use:
9269
9270           gm montage -texture bumps.jpg eagle.jpg eagle.png
9271
9272
9273       To join several GIF images together  without  any  extraneous  graphics
9274       (e.g.  no label, no shadowing, no surrounding tile frame), use:
9275
9276           gm montage +frame +shadow +label -tile 5x1
9277                   -geometry 50x50+0+0 *.png joined.png
9278
9279

OPTIONS

9281       Any  option  you  specify on the command line remains in effect for the
9282       group of images following it, until the  group  is  terminated  by  the
9283       appearance  of  any option or -noop.  For example, to make a montage of
9284       three images, the first with 32 colors, the second  with  an  unlimited
9285       number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
9286
9287
9288           gm montage -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
9289                    -colors 16 cockatoo.3 cockatoos.miff
9290
9291
9292       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
9293
9294
9295       -adjoin
9296              join images into a single multi-image file
9297
9298       -affine <matrix>
9299              drawing transform matrix
9300
9301       -authenticate <string>
9302              decrypt image with this password
9303
9304       -background <color>
9305              the background color
9306
9307       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
9308              blue chromaticity primary point
9309
9310       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
9311              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
9312
9313       -bordercolor <color>
9314              the border color
9315
9316       -borderwidth <geometry>
9317              the border width
9318
9319       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9320              remove pixels from the interior of an image
9321
9322       -colors <value>
9323              preferred number of colors in the image
9324
9325       -colorspace <value>
9326              the type of colorspace
9327
9328       -comment <string>
9329              annotate an image with a comment
9330
9331       -compose <operator>
9332              the type of image composition
9333
9334       -compress <type>
9335              the type of image compression
9336
9337       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9338              preferred size and location of the cropped image
9339
9340       -debug <events>
9341              enable debug printout
9342
9343       -define <key>{=<value>},...
9344              add coder/decoder specific options
9345
9346       -density <width>x<height>
9347              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
9348
9349       -depth <value>
9350              depth of the image
9351
9352       -display <host:display[.screen]>
9353              specifies the X server to contact
9354
9355       -dispose <method>
9356              GIF disposal method
9357
9358       -dither
9359              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
9360
9361       -draw <string>
9362              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
9363
9364       -encoding <type>
9365              specify the text encoding
9366
9367       -endian <type>
9368              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
9369
9370       -fill <color>
9371              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
9372
9373       -filter <type>
9374              use this type of filter when resizing an image
9375
9376       -font <name>
9377              use this font when annotating the image with text
9378
9379       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
9380              surround the image with an ornamental border
9381
9382       -gamma <value>
9383              level of gamma correction
9384
9385       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
9386              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
9387
9388       -gravity <type>
9389              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
9390
9391       -green-primary <x>,<y>
9392              green chromaticity primary point
9393
9394       -help  print usage instructions
9395
9396       -interlace <type>
9397              the type of interlacing scheme
9398
9399       -label <name>
9400              assign a label to an image
9401
9402       -limit <type> <value>
9403              Disk,  File,  Map,  Memory,  Pixels,  Width,  Height  or Threads
9404              resource limit
9405
9406       -log <string>
9407              Specify format for debug log
9408
9409       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
9410
9411       -mattecolor <color>
9412              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
9413
9414       -mode <value>
9415              mode of operation
9416
9417       -monitor
9418              show progress indication
9419
9420       -monochrome
9421              transform the image to black and white
9422
9423       -noop  NOOP (no option)
9424
9425       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9426              size and location of an image canvas
9427
9428       -pen <color>
9429              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9430
9431       -pointsize <value>
9432              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9433
9434       -quality <value>
9435              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9436
9437       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9438              red chromaticity primary point
9439
9440       -render
9441              render vector operations
9442
9443       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9444              Adjust image page offsets
9445
9446       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9447              resize an image
9448
9449       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9450              rotate the image
9451
9452       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9453              chroma subsampling factors
9454
9455       -scenes <value-value>
9456              range of image scene numbers to read
9457
9458       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
9459              shadow the montage
9460
9461       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9462              sharpen the image
9463
9464       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9465              width and height of the image
9466
9467       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9468
9469       -stroke <color>
9470              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9471
9472       -strokewidth <value>
9473              set the stroke width
9474
9475       -texture <filename>
9476              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9477
9478       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9479              resize an image (quickly)
9480
9481       -tile <geometry>
9482              layout of images [montage]
9483
9484       -title <string>
9485              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
9486
9487       -transform
9488              transform the image
9489
9490       -transparent <color>
9491              make this color transparent within the image
9492
9493       -treedepth <value>
9494              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9495
9496       -trim  trim an image
9497
9498       -type <type>
9499              the image type
9500
9501       -verbose
9502              print detailed information about the image
9503
9504       -version
9505              print GraphicsMagick version string
9506
9507       -white-point <x>,<y>
9508              chromaticity white point
9509
9510              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
9511              above.
9512
9513

X RESOURCES

9515       Montage  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
9516       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
9517       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
9518
9519       All  montage options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, mon‐
9520       tage uses the following X resources:
9521
9522       background (class Background)
9523              background color
9524
9525              Specifies the preferred color to use  for  the  composite  image
9526              background.  The default is #ccc.
9527
9528       borderColor (class BorderColor)
9529              border color
9530
9531              Specifies  the  preferred  color  to use for the composite image
9532              border. The default is #ccc.
9533
9534       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
9535              border width
9536
9537              Specifies the width in pixels of the composite image border. The
9538              default is 2.
9539
9540       font (class Font)
9541              font to use
9542
9543              Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use when displaying
9544              text within the composite image. The default is 9x15, fixed,  or
9545              5x8 determined by the composite image size.
9546
9547       matteColor (class MatteColor)
9548              color of the frame
9549
9550              Specify  the color of an image frame. A 3D effect is achieved by
9551              using highlight and shadow colors derived from this  color.  The
9552              default value is #697B8F.
9553
9554       pen (class Pen)
9555              text color
9556
9557              Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the compos‐
9558              ite image.  The default is black.
9559
9560       title (class Title)
9561              composite image title
9562
9563              This resource specifies the title to be placed at the top of the
9564              composite  image. The default is not to place a title at the top
9565              of the composite image.
9566

GM TIME

DESCRIPTION

9569       time executes an  arbitrary  gm  utility  command  (e.g.  convert)  and
9570       reports  the  user and elapsed time.  This provides way to measure com‐
9571       mand execution times similar to the Unix ´time' command but in a porta‐
9572       ble and consistent way.
9573

EXAMPLES

9575       To obtain time information for the execution of a command:
9576
9577       %  gm time convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm convert input.ppm
9578       -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm    22.60s user 0.00s system  2354%  cpu  0.960
9579       total
9580
9581       Here is the interpretation of the above output:
9582
9583           user - the total user time consumed.
9584           system - the total system time consumed.
9585           total - the total elapsed time consumed.
9586
9587

OPTIONS

9589       The  time  command reqires no options other than the gm command to exe‐
9590       cute.
9591

GM VERSION

DESCRIPTION

9594       version displays the software release  version,  build  quantum  (pixel
9595       sample)  depth,  web  site URL, copyright notice, enabled features sup‐
9596       port, configuration parameters, and final build options used  to  build
9597       the  software.   The  available information depends on how the software
9598       was configured and the host system.
9599

EXAMPLES

9601       To display the version information:
9602
9603         GraphicsMagick 1.3.27a 2017-12-11 Q16 http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/
9604         Copyright (C) 2002-2020 GraphicsMagick Group.
9605         Additional copyrights and licenses apply to this software.
9606         See http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/www/Copyright.html for details.
9607         Feature Support:
9608           Native Thread Safe       yes
9609           Large Files (> 32 bit)   yes
9610           Large Memory (> 32 bit)  yes
9611           BZIP                     yes
9612           DPS                      no
9613           FlashPix                 no
9614           FreeType                 yes
9615           Ghostscript (Library)    no
9616           JBIG                     yes
9617           JPEG-2000                yes
9618           JPEG                     yes
9619           Little CMS               yes
9620           Loadable Modules         no
9621           OpenMP                   yes (201307)
9622           PNG                      yes
9623           TIFF                     yes
9624           TRIO                     no
9625           UMEM                     no
9626           WebP                     yes
9627           WMF                      yes
9628           X11                      yes
9629           XML                      yes
9630           ZLIB                     yes
9631         Host type: x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu
9632         Configured using the command:
9633           ./configure  ...
9634         Final Build Parameters:
9635           CC       = ...
9636           CFLAGS   = ...
9637           CPPFLAGS = ...
9638           CXX      = ...
9639           CXXFLAGS = ...
9640           LDFLAGS  = ...
9641           LIBS     = ...
9642
9643

OPTIONS

9645       The version command does not currently support any options.
9646
9647
9648
9649GraphicsMagick                    2020/07/19                             gm(1)
Impressum